adtran mx3112 manual

MX3112System ManualDocument Number: 61189901L1-1AMay 2006

PRELIMINARY

NETNET

ETHERNET

MX3RMM

®

MX3112 System Manual

Front Matter

TrademarksAny brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names of their respective holders.

To the Holder of the ManualThe contents of this publication are current as of the date of publication. ADTRAN® reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice.

In no event will ADTRAN be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages or for commercial losses even if ADTRAN has been advised thereof as a result of issue of this publication.

901 Explorer BoulevardP.O. Box 140000

Huntsville, AL 35814-4000(256) 963-8000

©2006 ADTRAN, Inc.All Rights Reserved.

®

ii PRELIMINARY 61189901L1-1A

Revision History

ConventionsThe following typographical conventions are used in this document:

This font indicates a cross-reference link.

This font indicates screen menus, fields, and parameters.

THIS FONT indicates keyboard keys (ENTER, ESC, ALT). Keys that are to be pressed simulta-neously are shown with a plus sign (ALT+X indicates that the ALT key and X key should be pressed at the same time).

This font indicates references to other documentation and is also used for emphasis.

This font indicates on-screen messages and prompts.

This font indicates text to be typed exactly as shown.

This font indicates silk-screen labels or other system label items.

This font is used for strong emphasis.

NOTENotes inform the user of additional, but essential, information or features.

CAUTIONCautions inform the user of potential damage, malfunction, or dis-ruption to equipment, software, or environment.

WARNINGWarnings inform the user of potential bodily pain, injury, or death.

Revision Date Description of Changes

A May 2006 This version of the manual reflects application software version B01.

61189901L1-1A PRELIMINARY iii


TrainingADTRAN offers training courses on our products. These courses include overviews on product features and functions while covering applications of ADTRAN’s product lines. ADTRAN provides a variety of training options, including customized training and courses taught at our facilities or at customer sites.

For inquiries concerning training, contact ADTRAN:

Training Phone: 800-615-1176, ext. 7500

Training Fax: 256-963-6700

Training Email: [email protected]

iv PRELIMINARY 61189901L1-1A

Contents

Section 1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Data Path Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Copper Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4DS3 Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Data Path Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

The Quick Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Application Mode: COT vs. RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Data Path Provisioning: DS1-to-Group Assignments and Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Step 1: Assign DS1s to Bonding Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Step 2: Provision Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12ACO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Section 2Engineering Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Dimensions of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

System Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3System Configurations for Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3System Configurations for DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Fuse Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

DSX-1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Section 3Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Bookend MX3112s - Copper Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Bookend MX3112s - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

61189901L1-1A PRELIMINARY v


OPTI-6100 and MX3112s (Copper Mode and DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Section 4Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Required Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Installing the MX3 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rackmount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Rear Chassis Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Installing Cards and Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Installing the Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Installing the MX3112 Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Installing the MX3ETH4 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Section 5Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Provisioning Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Data Path Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Description of Packet Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Section 6User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

System Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Remote Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Logging on to the MX3112 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Menu Trees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47MX3112 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49

vi PRELIMINARY 61189901L1-1A

Contents

Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51Application Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53DS3 Interface Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55

Equipment Identification Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57DS1 Port Interfaces Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59

DS1 Port Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64

DS1 Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu (Copper Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70DS1 Timing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72

DS1 Timing Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75Link Identifiers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76

Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78Bonding Groups Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79

Bonding Group Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81Packet Flows Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83

Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85Sort By Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88Quick-Set Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89

Ethernet Client Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91

Traffic Classes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93Equipment Protection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96General Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97Network Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99

Management Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101Rear Ethernet Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103Network Service Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105SNMP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106

Trap Host Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108Auto Save Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110Security Administration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111

Users Currently Logged On Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112Edit Accounts Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113

Edit User Account Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115Access Tech Support Account Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116

Quick Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122

Controller Equipment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124DS3 Status Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126Environmental Alarms Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130Ethernet Client Ports Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-132DS1 Ports Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-133DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-135

Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138DS1 Port Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140Bonding DS1s Menu (Copper Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142Bonding DS1s Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-143DS3 Test Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-145DS1s in DS3 Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146

DS1 in DS3 Test Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-147Test Alarm Relays Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149

61189901L1-1A PRELIMINARY vii


Performance Monitoring Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-151DS3 Stats Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-153

Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-156Near End Quarter Hourly Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-157Far End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-158Far End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-159Near End Thresholds Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-161

Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-162Far End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-163

Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-164DS1 Port Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-165

DS1 # Port Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-166Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-167Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-168Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-169Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-170

DS1 Bonding Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-171DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu (Copper Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-173DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-175

Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-178Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-179Far End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-180Far End Quarter Hourly Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-181Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-182Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-183Far End Thresholds Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-184Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-185

Bonding Group Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-186Bonding Group # Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-187

Daily Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-188Quarter Hourly Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-189Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-190Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-191

Ethernet Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-192Ethernet Port # Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-193

Daily Performance Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-195Quarter Hourly Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-196Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-197Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-198

System Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-199Master Alarms Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-200Controller Alarms Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-202User-Definable Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-204

Environmental Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-205Auxiliary Input Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-206Power Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-207

Remote Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-208Firmware Upgrade Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-209

Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-210TFTP Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211

TFTP Update Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-212Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-213

viii PRELIMINARY 61189901L1-1A

Contents

Section 7Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

MX3 Fan Module Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Firmware Upgrade Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Upgrading a Redundant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Controller-to-Controller Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Appendix AWarranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Warranty and Customer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1ADTRAN Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1ADTRAN Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1ADTRAN Repair/CAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1Repair and Return Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

61189901L1-1A PRELIMINARY ix


Figures

Figure 1-1. MX3112 System Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Figure 1-2. Copper Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Figure 1-3. Copper Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Figure 1-4. DS3 Mode Block Diagram using P/N 1189901L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Figure 1-5. DS3 Mode Block Diagram using P/N 1189901L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Figure 1-6. Bonding Group Assignment Example (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Figure 1-7. Bonding Group Assignment Example (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Figure 1-8. Flow Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Figure 1-9. MX3112 Controller Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Figure 3-1. Physical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Figure 3-2. Logical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Figure 3-3. Physical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Figure 3-4. Logical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Figure 3-5. Physical Configuration of OPTI-6100 and MX3112s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Figure 3-6. Logical Configuration of OPTI-6100 and MX3112s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Figure 4-1. 19-inch Rack Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Figure 4-2. 23-inch Rack Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Figure 4-3. Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Figure 4-4. Fuse and Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Figure 4-5. MX3 Chassis Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Figure 4-6. MX3 Fan Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Figure 4-7. MX3112 Controller Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Figure 4-8. MX3ETH4 Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Figure 5-1. Quick Setup Menu for Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Figure 5-2. Packet Flows Menu for Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Figure 5-3. Quick Setup Menu for Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Figure 5-4. Packet Flows Menu for Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Figure 6-1. Craft Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Figure 6-2. Remote Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Figure 6-3. Quick Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Figure 6-4. Management Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Figure 6-5. Management Mode Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Figure 6-6. Management VLAN ID Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Figure 6-7. Management Port/Group Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Figure 6-8. VLAN-Based Management of a Remote MX3112 through a GEFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Figure 6-9. VLAN-Based Management of a Remote MX3112 through Two GEFMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Figure 6-10. VLAN-Based Management of Local and Remote MX3112s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Figure 6-11. MX3112 Main Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Figure 6-12. Configuration and Provisioning Menu Trees - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Figure 6-13. Quick Setup Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20Figure 6-14. Status and Test Menu Trees - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21Figure 6-15. Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22Figure 6-16. DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23Figure 6-17. DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Figure 6-18. Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25Figure 6-19. Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26Figure 6-20. System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27Figure 6-21. MX3112 Main Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28Figure 6-22. Configuration and Provisioning Menu Trees - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29Figure 6-23. Quick Setup Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36Figure 6-24. Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

x PRELIMINARY 61189901L1-1A

Figures

Figure 6-25. DS3 Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40Figure 6-26. DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42Figure 6-27. DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43Figure 6-28. Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44Figure 6-29. Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45Figure 6-30. System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46Figure 6-31. MX3112 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47Figure 6-32. Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49Figure 6-33. Provisioning Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51Figure 6-34. Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51Figure 6-35. Application Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53Figure 6-36. DS3 Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55Figure 6-37. Equipment Identification Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57Figure 6-38. DS1 Port Interfaces Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59Figure 6-39. DS1 Port Interfaces Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59Figure 6-40. DS1 Port Provisioning Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61Figure 6-41. DS1 Port Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62Figure 6-42. Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64Figure 6-43. Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64Figure 6-44. DS1 Bonding Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66Figure 6-45. DS1 Bonding Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66Figure 6-46. DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68Figure 6-47. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70Figure 6-48. DS1 Timing Menu (DS1 Timing Mode = Local or Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72Figure 6-49. DS1 Timing Menu (DS1 Timing Mode = Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73Figure 6-50. DS1 Timing Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75Figure 6-51. Link Identifiers Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76Figure 6-52. Link Identifiers Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76Figure 6-53. Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78Figure 6-54. Bonding Groups Menu (RT Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79Figure 6-55. Bonding Groups Menu (COT Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79Figure 6-56. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81Figure 6-57. Packet Flows Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83Figure 6-58. Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85Figure 6-59. Sort By Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88Figure 6-60. Quick-Set Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89Figure 6-61. Ethernet Client Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90Figure 6-62. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91Figure 6-63. Traffic Classes Menu with Classification Mode set to Explicit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94Figure 6-64. Traffic Classes Menu with Classification Mode set to P-Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95Figure 6-65. Equipment Protection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96Figure 6-66. General Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97Figure 6-67. Network Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99Figure 6-68. Management Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101Figure 6-69. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103Figure 6-70. Network Service Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105Figure 6-71. SNMP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106Figure 6-72. Trap Host Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108Figure 6-73. Auto Save Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110Figure 6-74. Security Administration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111Figure 6-75. Users Currently Logged On Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112Figure 6-76. Edit Accounts Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113Figure 6-77. Edit User Account Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115Figure 6-78. Access Tech Support Account Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116Figure 6-79. Quick Setup Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117

61189901L1-1A PRELIMINARY xi


Figure 6-80. Quick Setup Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118Figure 6-81. Status Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122Figure 6-82. Status Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122Figure 6-83. Controller Equipment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124Figure 6-84. DS3 Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126Figure 6-85. Environmental Alarms Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130Figure 6-86. Ethernet Client Ports Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-132Figure 6-87. DS1 Ports Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-133Figure 6-88. DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-135Figure 6-89. DS1 Bonding Groups Status Screen (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-135Figure 6-90. Test Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138Figure 6-91. Test Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138Figure 6-92. DS1 Port Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140Figure 6-93. Bonding DS1s Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142Figure 6-94. Bonding DS1s Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-143Figure 6-95. DS3 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-145Figure 6-96. DS1s in DS3 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146Figure 6-97. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-147Figure 6-98. Test Alarm Relays Menu with Inactive Alarm Relay Test Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149Figure 6-99. Test Alarm Relays Menu with Active Alarm Relay Test Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149Figure 6-100. Performance Monitoring Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-151Figure 6-101. Performance Monitoring Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-151Figure 6-102. DS3 Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-153Figure 6-103. Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-156Figure 6-104. Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-157Figure 6-105. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-157Figure 6-106. Far End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-158Figure 6-107. Far End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-159Figure 6-108. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-160Figure 6-109. Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-161Figure 6-110. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-162Figure 6-111. Far End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-163Figure 6-112. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-164Figure 6-113. DS1 Port Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-165Figure 6-114. DS1 # Port Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-166Figure 6-115. Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-167Figure 6-116. Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-168Figure 6-117. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-168Figure 6-118. Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-169Figure 6-119. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-170Figure 6-120. DS1 Bonding Stats Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-171Figure 6-121. DS1 Bonding Stats Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-171Figure 6-122. DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-173Figure 6-123. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-175Figure 6-124. Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-178Figure 6-125. Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-179Figure 6-126. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-179Figure 6-127. Far End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-180Figure 6-128. Far End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-181Figure 6-129. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-181Figure 6-130. Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-182Figure 6-131. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-183Figure 6-132. Far End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-184Figure 6-133. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-185Figure 6-134. Bonding Group Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-186

xii PRELIMINARY 61189901L1-1A

Figures

Figure 6-135. Bonding Group # Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-187Figure 6-136. Daily Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-188Figure 6-137. Quarter Hourly Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-189Figure 6-138. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-189Figure 6-139. Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-190Figure 6-140. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-191Figure 6-141. Ethernet Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-192Figure 6-142. Ethernet Port # Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-193Figure 6-143. Daily Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-195Figure 6-144. Detailed Daily Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-195Figure 6-145. Quarter Hourly Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-196Figure 6-146. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-196Figure 6-147. Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-197Figure 6-148. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-198Figure 6-149. System Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-199Figure 6-150. Master Alarms Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-200Figure 6-151. Controller Alarms Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-202Figure 6-152. User-Definable Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-204Figure 6-153. Environmental Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-205Figure 6-154. Auxiliary Input Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-206Figure 6-155. Power Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-207Figure 6-156. Remote Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-208Figure 6-157. Firmware Upgrade Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-209Figure 6-158. Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-210Figure 6-159. TFTP Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211Figure 6-160. TFTP Update Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-212Figure 7-1. Firmware Upgrade Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Figure 7-2. Firmware Upgrade Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Figure 7-3. Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

61189901L1-1A PRELIMINARY xiii


Tables

Table 1-1. Tributaries for Channelized DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Table 1-2. MX3112 System Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Table 1-3. Mapping and Bonding Group Assignments (for P/N 1189901L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Table 1-4. Mapping and Bonding Group Assignments (for P/N 1189901L2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Table 1-5. LED Status for Active MX3112 Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Table 1-6. LED Status for Standby MX3112 Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Table 2-1. MX3112 Equipment Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Table 2-2. Maximum Current Draw - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Table 2-3. Heat Dissipation - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Table 2-4. Maximum Current Draw - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Table 2-5. Heat Dissipation - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Table 2-6. Fuse Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Table 2-7. Amphenol Connector Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Table 2-8. MX3 Chassis (P/N 1189001L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Table 2-9. MX3112 Controller Card (P/N 1189901L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Table 2-10. MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module (P/N 1189902L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Table 2-11. MX3 Fan Module (P/N 1189007L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Table 3-1. Equipment Required - MX3112 Ethernet Transport Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Table 4-1. Amphenol Connector Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Table 4-2. AUX Inputs 1 - 8 Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Table 4-3. Ethernet Pin Assignments for Ports 1 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Table 5-1. Default Provisioning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Table 5-2. Additional Default Provisioning Options for DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Table 6-1. MX3112 Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Table 6-2. MX3112 Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47Table 6-3. Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49Table 6-4. Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52Table 6-5. Application Mode Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53Table 6-6. DS3 Interface Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55Table 6-7. Equipment Identification Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57Table 6-8. DS1 Port Interfaces Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60Table 6-9. DS1 Port Provisioning Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62Table 6-10. Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65Table 6-11. DS1 Bonding Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67Table 6-12. DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68Table 6-13. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70Table 6-14. DS1 Timing Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72Table 6-15. DS1 Timing Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73Table 6-16. DS1 Timing Mode Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75Table 6-17. Link Identifiers Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77Table 6-18. Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78Table 6-19. Bonding Groups Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80Table 6-20. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81Table 6-21. Packet Flows Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83Table 6-22. Packet Flows Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83Table 6-23. Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85Table 6-24. Sort By Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88Table 6-25. Quick-Set Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89Table 6-26. Ethernet Client Port Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90Table 6-27. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91Table 6-28. Traffic Classes Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94

xiv PRELIMINARY 61189901L1-1A

Tables

Table 6-29. Traffic Classes Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95Table 6-30. Equipment Protection Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96Table 6-31. General Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98Table 6-32. Network Management Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99Table 6-33. Management Mode Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101Table 6-34. Management Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102Table 6-35. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103Table 6-36. Network Service Ports Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105Table 6-37. SNMP Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106Table 6-38. Trap Host Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108Table 6-39. Trap Host Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109Table 6-40. Auto Save Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110Table 6-41. Security Administration Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111Table 6-42. Users Currently Logged On Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112Table 6-43. Edit Accounts Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113Table 6-44. Edit Accounts Menu Hot Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113Table 6-45. Edit User Accounts Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114Table 6-46. Edit User Account Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115Table 6-47. Quick Setup Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118Table 6-48. Status Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123Table 6-49. Controller Equipment Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124Table 6-50. Status for Active Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124Table 6-51. Status for Standby Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125Table 6-52. Alarm Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125Table 6-53. DS3 Status Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126Table 6-54. Alarm Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-127Table 6-55. Remote System Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128Table 6-56. DS2 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-129Table 6-57. DS3 Status Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-129Table 6-58. Environmental Alarms Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130Table 6-59. Environmental Alarm External Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131Table 6-60. Ethernet Client Ports Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-132Table 6-61. DS1 Ports Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-133Table 6-62. DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-136Table 6-63. DS1 Port States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-136Table 6-64. Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-139Table 6-65. DS1 Port Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140Table 6-66. Bonding DS1s Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142Table 6-67. Bonded DS1 Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142Table 6-68. Bonding DS1s Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-143Table 6-69. DS1 Tributary Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-144Table 6-70. DS3 Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-145Table 6-71. DS1s in DS3 Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146Table 6-72. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-147Table 6-73. Test Alarm Relays Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-150Table 6-74. Performance Monitoring Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152Table 6-75. DS3 Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-153Table 6-76. DS3 Near End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-154Table 6-77. DS3 Far End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-155Table 6-78. Near End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-161Table 6-79. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-162Table 6-80. Far End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-163Table 6-81. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-164Table 6-82. DS1 Port Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-165Table 6-83. DS1 # Port Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-166

61189901L1-1A PRELIMINARY xv


Table 6-84. Near End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-167Table 6-85. Near End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-169Table 6-86. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-170Table 6-87. DS1 Bonding Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-172Table 6-88. DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-173Table 6-89. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-175Table 6-90. Near End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-176Table 6-91. Far End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-177Table 6-92. Near End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-182Table 6-93. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-183Table 6-94. Far End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-184Table 6-95. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-185Table 6-96. Bonding Group Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-186Table 6-97. Bonding Group # Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-187Table 6-98. Bonding Group Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-188Table 6-99. Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-190Table 6-100. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-191Table 6-101. Ethernet Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-192Table 6-102. Ethernet Port # Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-193Table 6-103. Ethernet Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-194Table 6-104. Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-197Table 6-105. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-198Table 6-106. System Alarms Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-199Table 6-107. Master Alarms Log Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-200Table 6-108. Master Alarms Log Screen Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-201Table 6-109. Controller Alarms Log Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-202Table 6-110. Controller Alarms Log Screen Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-203Table 6-111. User-Definable Alarms Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-204Table 6-112. Environmental Alarms Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-205Table 6-113. Auxiliary Input Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-206Table 6-114. Power Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-207Table 6-115. Remote Management Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-208Table 6-116. Firmware Upgrade Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-209Table 6-117. Method Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-210Table 6-118. Method Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211Table 6-119. TFTP Update Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211Table 6-120. TFTP Update Status Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-212Table 6-121. TFTP Download Progress Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-213Table 6-122. TFTP Update Status Screen Hot Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-213

xvi PRELIMINARY 61189901L1-1A

Section 1Introduction

DESCRIPTION

The MX3112 system (see Figure 1-1) bonds DS1s together to enable Ethernet service delivery over multiple copper DS1 facilities. The MX3112 system bonds up to twelve or sixteen DS1s, depending on the controller card, into bonding groups to conduct Ethernet traffic from four 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports. The MX3112 controller card, P/N 1189901L1, supports up to 12 bonded DS1s. The MX3112 controller card, P/N 1189901L2, supports up to 16 bonded DS1s. The 1 RU chassis (P/N 1189001L1) provides circuit protection via redundant MX3112 controller cards.

As shown in Figure 1-1, the MX3112 system is composed of the following components:

• Redundant or non-redundant MX3112 controller cards

• A module in expansion slot A that provides connectivity for the four 10/100Base-T Ethernet facilities

Figure 1-1. MX3112 System Front Panel

The MX3112 system supports two basic modes of operation: copper (DS1) mode and DS3 mode. In copper mode, twelve bonded DS1s are directly accessible via amphenol connectors on the rear side of the chassis. In DS3 mode, twelve or sixteen DS1s, depending on the controller card, are multiplexed into a channelized DS3 as described in Table 1-1.

B

A

MX3112 Controller Card MX3 4-Port Ethernet Module MX3 ChassisMX3 Fan Module

61189901L1-1A PRELIMINARY 1-1


Table 1-2 lists the products used when operating in both copper mode and DS3 mode. For detailed specification information on the products listed, refer to the “Section 2, Engineering Guidelines”.

Table 1-1. Tributaries for Channelized DS3

Tributaries Description

1 - 12 These tributaries are cross connected to the twelve physical DSX-1 ports on the amphenol connectors of the chassis available for carrying TDM traffic.

13 - 24 These tributaries are available for bonding together into groups for carrying Ethernet traffic.

25 - 28 For MX3112 controller card (P/N 1189901L1), these tributaries are not used.For MX3112 controller card (P/N 1189901L2), these tributaries are available for bonding together into groups for carrying Ethernet traffic.

Table 1-2. MX3112 System Part Numbers

Part Number Description CLEI

1189001L1 MX3 Chassis M3M2A00A_ _

1189901L1 MX3112 Controller Card (supports up to 12 bonded DS1s) M3CU100B_ _

1189901L2 MX3112 Controller Card (supports up to 16 bonded DS1s) M3CU180B_ _

1189902L1 MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module (MX3ETH4) M3LIPC0A_ _

1189007L1 MX3 Fan Module M3CU270B_ _

1189005L1 MX3 Controller Blank Plug N/A

1189006L1 MX3 Module Blank Plug N/A

1-2 PRELIMINARY 61189901L1-1A

Section 1, Introduction - Features

FEATURESThe major features of the MX3112 system are as follows:

• Chassis supports dual controller slots and two expansion slots

• Rack-mountable chassis (19-inch or 23-inch racks)

• Compact 1 RU size

• Hot-swappable controller cards provide 1:1 redundancy

• Bonds up to twelve or sixteen DS1s, depending on the controller card, into up to four bonding groups for Ethernet delivery

• Supports four 10/100Base-T Ethernet facilities

• Supports two primary modes of operation (copper mode and DS3 mode)

• Provides graceful handling of impairments of bonded DS1s

• Provides monitoring of differential delay (skew) on bonded DS1s

• Supports a variety of VLAN tag manipulation options (push, pop, swap)

• Supports rate limiting of traffic

• Supports a variety of class of service features for Ethernet traffic prioritization

• Supports a variety of transmit timing options for bonded DS1s

• Supports a variety of methods of management

– VT100 menus via front panel RS-232 craft port

– VT100 menus of a remote MX3112 system accessible via an in-band channel from a local MX3112 system or OPTI-6100 GEFM module

– Ethernet connectivity providing VT100 menus, TL1, and SNMP access either locally via a RJ-45 10/100Base-T Ethernet port on the chassis or remotely via a VLAN on a desig-nated bonding group or customer Ethernet port

• Supports a comprehensive suite of loopbacks and other test features

• Supports a comprehensive suite of performance monitoring statistics for all interfaces

• Supports a large variety of applications involving other MX3112 systems and the OPTI-6100 GEFM module (P/N 1184535L1)

• NEBS Level 3 compliant

• Powered via ±24 VDC or –48 VDC

• Extended temperature range, –40°C to +65°C

• Wire-wrap pins available for critical, major, and minor alarm indications

• Four auxiliary alarm inputs, any of which can be designated as alarm cut-off (ACO)

• Dual independent power feeds with separate return paths to all card slots



DATA PATH DESCRIPTIONThe MX3112 system supports two basic modes of operation: copper mode and DS3 mode. The block diagrams that follow describe the operation of the MX3112 system in each mode. The default mode is copper mode.

Copper Mode Block DiagramWhen operating in copper mode, the MX3112 system directly routes twelve bonded DS1s to the amphenol interfaces on the rear of the chassis. The integrated M13 multiplexer and the DS3 interface are effectively unused when operating in copper mode as shown in Figure 1-2. Figure 1-3 illustrates the functional block diagram of the MX3112 system when operating in copper mode.

Figure 1-2. Copper Mode Block Diagram

DS3LIU

Cross-connect

M13 muxand DS3interfaceare not

used

PHY

PHY

PHY

PHYDS3A

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Bonding Engine

Switch

MX3ETH44-Port10/100 Base-TEthernet Module

G1

DS1s

G2

DS1 #1DS1 #2DS1 #3DS1 #4DS1 #5DS1 #6DS1 #7DS1 #8

DS1 #12

DS1 #9DS1 #10DS1 #11

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

DS1LIUs

DS1Framers

BondingGroups

Ethernet Ports

MX3ETH41189902L1

PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4

(Controller Card)


Section 1, Introduction - Data Path Description

Figure 1-3. Copper Mode Block Diagram

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4


DS1 #12

DS1 #9DS1 #10DS1 #11


MX3ETH41189902L1


(Controller Card)

DS1LIUs

Bonding Engine

DS1Framers

Ethernet Ports

Switch

G1

G2

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

FramersFDS1DS1

FramersBonding Engine

Bonding EngineLIUsLIU

DS1DS1LIUs

PHY

PHY

PHY

PHY

DS1sBondingGroups



DS3 Mode Block DiagramWhen operating in DS3 mode, the MX3112 system supports a full M13 multiplexer of which the DS1 tributaries carry both TDM traffic and bonded traffic. The channelized DS3 that is produced operates in either C-bit or M13 framing modes.

The first twelve DS1 tributaries of the DS3 are available for carrying TDM traffic and are directly accessible via the amphenol connectors on the rear side of the chassis.

The remaining DS1 tributaries, 13 through 28, are available for bonding together to carry Ethernet traffic from the four Ethernet ports. The MX3112 controller card (P/N 1189901L1) makes use of twelve of these tributaries (13-24) for bonding, with the remaining four tribu-taries (25-28) unused. The MX3112 controller card (P/N 1189901L2) makes use of all sixteen of the remaining DS1 tributaries for bonding.

The diagrams to follow illustrate the functional block diagram of the MX3112 system when operating in DS3 mode. Figure 1-4 illustrates the MX3112 system using the controller card (P/N 1189901L1), and Figure 1-5 illustrates the MX3112 system using the controller card (P/N 1189901L2).

Figure 1-4. DS3 Mode Block Diagram using P/N 1189901L1

PHY

PHY

PHY

PHY

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

DS3A DS3LIU

Bonding Engine

Switch


G1

DS1s

G2


DS1 #12

DS1 #9DS1 #10DS1 #11

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

DS1LIUs

DS1Framers

BondingGroups

MX3ETH41189902L1


(Controller Card)

DS1 trib #13DS1 trib #14DS1 trib #15DS1 trib #16DS1 trib #17DS1 trib #18DS1 trib #19DS1 trib #20

DS1 trib #24

DS1 trib #21DS1 trib #22DS1 trib #23


DS1 trib #12




Figure 1-5. DS3 Mode Block Diagram using P/N 1189901L2

Table 1-3 shows the mapping and bonding group assignments for DS3 Mode for the MX3112 system when using the controller card (P/N 1189901L1). Table 1-4 shows the mapping and bonding group assignments when using the controller card (P/N 1189901L2).

Table 1-3. Mapping and Bonding Group Assignments (for P/N 1189901L1)

DS3 Tributary

Assignment DS3 Tributary


Assignment

1 DSX-1 Port 1 13 User Assigned Bonding Group 25 N/A




5 DSX-1 Port 5 17 User Assigned Bonding Group





PHY

PHY

PHY

PHY

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

DS3A DS3LIU

Bonding Engine

Switch


G1

DS1s

G2


DS1 #12

DS1 #9DS1 #10DS1 #11

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

DS1LIUs

DS1Framers

BondingGroups

MX3ETH41189902L1


(Controller Card)


DS1 trib #24DS1 trib #25DS1 trib #26DS1 trib #27DS1 trib #28



DS1 trib #12




Data Path ProvisioningThe MX3112 system is flexible for a wide variety of applications and supports a user interface designed to simplify and expedite the process of provisioning the data path. This section briefly describes the most important steps for provisioning the system. More detailed explana-tions of certain features are available in the “Data Path Provisioning” on page 5-5.

The Quick Setup MenuThe MX3112 supports several provisioning options to assist with optimizing the data path for a specific application. To help expedite the process of turning up the system, the Quick Setup menu is designed to provide fast access to the options that are often most critical for provi-sioning the data path.





DS3 Tributary



Assignment

1 DSX-1 Port 1 13 User Assigned Bonding Group 25 User Assigned Bonding Group













DS3 Tributary



Assignment



Application Mode: COT vs. RTThe application mode of the MX3112 has two components:

• The basic data path configuration (copper mode or DS3 mode)

• The administrative role of the system (COT mode or RT mode)

The first component of the application mode (copper/DS3) is described in the “Copper Mode Block Diagram” on page 1-4 and the “DS3 Mode Block Diagram” on page 1-6.

The second component of the application mode (COT/RT) typically reflects the location and role of the system in a network in relation to the far end equipment that terminates the bonded DS1s. It is useful to note at this point that, in general, the near end MX3112 system is provisioned as COT and the far end (remote) system is provisioned as RT.

A benefit of this component of the application mode is that it allows automatic provisioning of assignments of DS1s to bonding groups at the RT system to reflect the provisioning at the COT system. That is, certain key provisioning options will be transferred automatically from the COT system to the RT system, thereby expediting the turn-up process.

Data Path Provisioning: DS1-to-Group Assignments and FlowsAfter provisioning the application mode of the system (copper/DS3 mode and COT/RT mode), two primary steps are involved in provisioning the data path.

1. Assign DS1s to bonding groups.

2. Provision a set of rules (called flows) to route traffic among the Ethernet ports and bonding groups.

As shown in Figure 1-2 through Figure 1-5, the MX3112 system contains a switch component that effectively has 8 ports. Four of these ports (P1 - P4) are associated with the four customer 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports, which are accessible via the MX3ETH4. The remaining four ports (G1 - G4) are bonding groups. Provision each of the four bonding groups to consist of one or more DS1s. Assign the DS1s that are available for bonding in any combination among the four bonding groups.

Step 1: Assign DS1s to Bonding Groups

Use the Quick Setup menu, as shown in Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-7, to accomplish the first step of provisioning the data path. The Quick Setup menu adapts to reflect the provisioned application mode (copper/DS3).

Figure 1-6 illustrates the Quick Setup menu when the MX3112 system is operating in copper mode. This example shows three physical DS1s assigned to each of the four bonding groups.



Figure 1-6. Bonding Group Assignment Example (Copper Mode)

Figure 1-7 illustrates the Quick Setup menu when the MX3112 system is operating in DS3 mode. This example shows three DS1 tributaries, within the DS3, assigned to each of the four bonding groups.

Figure 1-7. Bonding Group Assignment Example (DS3 Mode)

Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System 01/01/05 12:00

Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE ID: Site 1 MX3112

MX3112->Quick Setup

Application Mode DS1 Port Bonding Group

1 - COT/RT : COT 12 - 1 1

2 - Copper/DS3 : Copper 13 - 2 1

14 - 3 1

Ethernet Client Ports 15 - 4 2

3 - Select Ethernet Client Ports 16 - 5 2

4 - Packet Flows 17 - 6 2

18 - 7 3

System 19 - 8 3

5 - Management Mode : Local 20 - 9 3

6 - IP Address : 10.100.51.94 21 - 10 4

7 - Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 22 - 11 4

8 - Gateway : 10.100.51.254 23 - 12 4

9 - Date : 04/18/2006

10 - Time : 14:03:15

11 - System ID : MX3112 LOCAL SYSTEM

Selection : '?' - System Help Screen



MX3112->Quick Setup

Application Mode DS3 Trib Bonding Group

1 - COT/RT : COT 12 - 13 1

2 - Copper/DS3 : DS3 13 - 14 1

14 - 15 1




18 - 19 3

System 19 - 20 3

5 - Management Mode : Local 20 - 21 3

6 - IP Address : 10.100.51.94 21 - 22 4

7 - Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 22 - 23 4

8 - Gateway : 10.100.51.254 23 - 24 4

9 - Date : 04/18/2006

10 - Time : 14:15:42

11 - System ID : MX3112 LOCAL SYSTEM




Step 2: Provision Flows

Use the Quick Setup menu, as shown in Figure 1-8, to accomplish the second step of provi-sioning the data path, provisioning flows.

In general, a flow specifies the criteria for a unidirectional data stream from a designated source port (or group) to a destination port (or group). The criteria that can be provisioned for a flow include the following:

• Search for specific combinations of source port (or group) and VLAN ID

• Forward the traffic for the given flow to a specified destination port or group

• Manipulate VLAN tags (push, pop, swap) and enable/disable priority inheritance for added tags

• Enforce bandwidth limitations (rate policing)

• Enforce class of service restrictions

Figure 1-8 illustrates an example of a simple flow configuration. In this example, two flows are provisioned to route all traffic bidirectionally between Port 1 and Group 1 with bandwidth restrictions in effect.

Figure 1-8. Flow Configuration Example

Flows can be provisioned with a great deal of flexibility, where traffic can be routed among any Ethernet port and bonding group. Refer to “Data Path Provisioning” on page 5-5 for a more complete explanation of flows.



MX3112->Provisioning->Packet Flows

Page 1 of 1

Src Dest

Port/ Src Committed Burst CoS Port/ Tag New New

Flow Group VID Rate (kbps) Rate (kbps) Class Group Manip VID Prio

1 - P1 - 2000 2500 1 G1 None - -

2 - G1 - 2000 2500 1 P1 None - -

----------------------------->> END OF FLOW LIST <<----------------------------

3 - Add New Flow '?' - System Help Screen

Selection:

(N)ext (P)revious (F)irst (L)ast (S)ort (Q)uick-Set Legend: G = Group P = Port



FRONT PANELThe MX3112 controller card has nine LEDs located on the front of the unit (see Figure 1-9) that display status information. Table 1-5 shows the LED status descriptions for the active MX3112 controller cards. Table 1-6 shows the status descriptions for the standby controller card.

Figure 1-9. MX3112 Controller Card LEDs

Table 1-5. LED Status for Active MX3112 Controller Card

LED LED State Card Condition

ACT Green Normal (All OK)

/ Green/Amber (Alternating) Normal and console open

� Red (Flashing) Card has failed

Amber Software update in progress

/ Red/Amber (Alternating) Card has failed and console open

ALM Green No critical, major, or minor alarms

Red Major or minor alarm in progress

� Red (Flashing) Critical alarm in progress

DS3 Off Copper (DSX-1) mode selected

Green Normal (DS3 OK)

Red AIS, OOF, RAI, or Idle

� Red (Flashing) DS3 LOS

� Red (Flashing once per event) Single/Burst DS3 code violations during previous second

/ Red/Green (Alternating) DS2 OOF

Amber In test (locally originated)

� Amber (Flashing) In test (remotely originated)

DSX-1 STAT Off All DSX-1 ports are disabled

Green Enabled DSX-1 ports normal (All OK)

Red Non-critical alarm (AIS) on an enabled DSX-1 port


Section 1, Introduction - Front Panel

ACO ButtonThe ACO (alarm cut off) button disables any audible alarms. Any active visual alarms remain active. Press the ACO button on the front panel to disable any audible alarms.

� Red (Flashing) LOS on an enabled port

� Red (Flashing once per event) Single/Burst RX DSX-1 code violations dur-ing previous second

DSX-1 TEST Off No DSX-1 tests in progress

� Red (Flashing once per event) Single/Burst pattern errors on DSX-1 test

Amber In test (locally originated)

� Amber (Flashing) In test (remotely originated)

ETHERNET 1-4 Off Link not established

Green Link established

Table 1-6. LED Status for Standby MX3112 Controller Card


ACT � Green (Flashing) Normal (All OK)

Amber Software update in progress

� Amber (Flashing) Not ready or software mismatch

� Red (Flashing) Card failure

ALM Off Permanent state during standby

DS3 Off Permanent state during standby

DSX-1 STAT Off Permanent state during standby

DSX-1 TEST Off Permanent state during standby

ETHERNET 1-4 Off Permanent state during standby

Table 1-5. LED Status for Active MX3112 Controller Card (Continued)




This page is intentionally blank.


Section 2Engineering Guidelines

INTRODUCTIONThis section provides engineering guidelines for network designers who are incorporating an MX3112 system into their network. This section provides the following guidelines:

• “Dimensions of Equipment” on page 2

• “System Power Requirements” on page 3

– “System Configurations for Copper Mode” on page 3

– “System Configurations for DS3 Mode” on page 4

– “Fuse Recommendations” on page 5

• “Network Connections” on page 5

• “DSX-1 Connections” on page 6

• “Compliance” on page 7



DIMENSIONS OF EQUIPMENTTable 2-1 provides the dimensions and weights of the MX3112 equipment.

Table 2-1. MX3112 Equipment Dimensions and Weights

Part Number Equipment Dimensions Weight

1189001L1 MX3 Chassis Height: 1.7 inches Width: 17.0 inches Depth: 8.6 inches

5.50 pounds

1189901L1 MX3112 Controller Card (sup-ports up to 12 bonded DS1s)

Height: 0.7 inches Width: 9.4 inches Depth: 7.6 inches

1.20 pounds

1189901L2 MX3112 Controller Card (sup-ports up to 16 bonded DS1s)


1.20 pounds

1189902L1 MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module


1.20 pounds

1189007L1 MX3 Fan Module Height: 1.7 inches Width: 1.5 inches Depth: 7.6 inches

0.50 pounds

1189005L1 MX3 Controller Blank Plug Height: 0.7 inches Width: 9.4 inches Depth: 7.6 inches

1.00 pounds

1189006L1 MX3 Module Blank Plug Height: 0.7 inches Width: 5.2 inches Depth: 7.6 inches

0.50 pounds


Section 2, Engineering Guidelines - System Power Requirements

SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTSThe following sections detail the power requirements for the MX3112 system in copper mode and DS3 mode.

System Configurations for Copper ModeTable 2-2 and Table 2-3 provide the maximum current draw and heat dissipation at –48 VDC (operating range of –42 VDC to –60 VDC) and ±24 VDC (operating range of ±22 VDC to ±27 VDC) for the different MX3112 system configurations in copper mode.

Table 2-2. Maximum Current Draw - Copper Mode

Part Number QuantityMaximum Current Draw

at –48 VDC at ±24 VDC

MX3112 (non-redundant)

1189901L1 1

0.45 amps 0.90 amps1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1

MX3112 (redundant)

1189901L1 2

0.69 amps 1.36 amps1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1

Table 2-3. Heat Dissipation - Copper Mode

Part Number QuantityHeat Dissipation



1189901L1 1

19.2 watts 19.7 watts1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1

MX3112 (redundant)

1189901L1 2

29.8 watts 30.0 watts1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1



System Configurations for DS3 ModeTable 2-4 and Table 2-5 provide the maximum current draw and heat dissipation at –48 VDC (operating range of –42 VDC to –60 VDC) and ±24 VDC (operating range of ±22 VDC to ±27 VDC) for the different MX3112 system configurations in DS3 mode.

Table 2-4. Maximum Current Draw - DS3 Mode

Part Number QuantityMaximum Current Draw



1189901L1 1

0.50 amps 1.00 amps1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1

MX3112 (redundant)

1189901L1 2

0.74 amps 1.43 amps1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1

Table 2-5. Heat Dissipation - DS3 Mode

Part Number QuantityHeat Dissipation



1189901L1 1

21.0 watts 21.9 watts1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1

MX3112 (redundant)

1189901L1 2

31.5 watts 31.7 watts1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1


Section 2, Engineering Guidelines - Network Connections

Fuse RecommendationsTable 2-6 provides data for determining the fuse needed for the fuse and alarm panel that services the MX3 chassis.

NETWORK CONNECTIONS

WARNINGThe DS3, Alarm, DSX-1, and Ethernet interfaces must not be metallically connected to interfaces which connect to the Outside Plant (OSP) or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metal-lically to OSP wiring.

Cable Specifications

NOTEConnect DS3 interfaces using coaxial cables that have shields grounded at both ends.

All coaxial cable for the MX3112 DS3 signals should meet the following minimum specifications.

• The coaxial cable should have characteristic impedance of 75 ohms.

• Nominal mutual capacitance should not exceed 20.4 pF/foot.

• The cable should conform to ANSI standard T1.102 (1993) pulse mask definition. The standard reference cable is a “WECO Type 728A” at 450 feet.

Approved cable types include the following:

• WECO 728A

• Lucent 728B

• Lucent 734A

• Lucent 735A (maximum length of 250 feet)

• Belden 9231

• Belden 1809A

Table 2-6. Fuse Recommendations

System Voltage Recommended Fuse

–48 VDC 1.5 amps, slow-blow

±24 VDC 3.0 amps, slow-blow



DSX-1 CONNECTIONS

WARNINGThe DS3, Alarm, DSX-1, and Ethernet interfaces must not be metallically connected to interfaces which connect to the Outside Plant (OSP) or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metal-lically to OSP wiring.

Table 2-7 provides the amphenol connector pin assignments for the MX3112 controller card.

Table 2-7. Amphenol Connector Pin List

PinFunction

PinRing Tip

1 Ring 1 Tip 1 33

2 Ring 2 Tip 2 34

3 Ring 3 Tip 3 35

4 Ring 4 Tip 4 36

5 Ring 5 Tip 5 37

6 Ring 6 Tip 6 38

7 Ring 7 Tip 7 39

8 Ring 8 Tip 8 40

9 Ring 9 Tip 9 41

10 Ring 10 Tip 10 42

11 Ring 11 Tip 11 43

12 Ring 12 Tip 12 44

32 FGND FGND 64


Section 2, Engineering Guidelines - Compliance

COMPLIANCEThe MX3112 system complies with NEBS Level 3 and is NRTL Listed to UL 60950. It is intended to be installed in a restricted access area only.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes and modifications not expressly approved by ADTRAN could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

CAUTIONPer GR-1089-CORE October 2002, Section 9, this system is designed and intended only for installation in a DC-C (common) Bonding and Grounding system. It is not intended or designed for installation in a DC-I (isolated) Bonding and Grounding system. The ground wire must be of equal or greater ampacity than the wire connected to the VDC return.

CAUTIONThe MX3112 controller card must be installed in a MX3 chassis (P/N 1189001L1) with a top assembly revision of “C” or later.

Table 2-8 through Table 2-11 provide the compliance codes for the different components of the MX3112 system.

Table 2-8. MX3 Chassis (P/N 1189001L1)

Code Input Output

Power Code (PC) F C

Telecommunication Code (TC) – –

Installation Code (IC) A –

Table 2-9. MX3112 Controller Card (P/N 1189901L1)

Code Input Output

Power Code (PC) F C





Table 2-10. MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module (P/N 1189902L1)

Code Input Output

Power Code (PC) F C



Table 2-11. MX3 Fan Module (P/N 1189007L1)

Code Input Output

Power Code (PC) F –




Section 3Application Guidelines

INTRODUCTIONThe MX3112 can operate in a variety of applications with other MX3112 systems, as well as with the OPTI-6100. This section describes some of the more common applications as follows:

• “Bookend MX3112s - Copper Mode” on page 2

• “Bookend MX3112s - DS3 Mode” on page 3

• “OPTI-6100 and MX3112s (Copper Mode and DS3 Mode)” on page 4

This section provides illustrations that describe both the physical connectivity of the inter-faces and the logical connectivity of the bonding groups.



BOOKEND MX3112S - COPPER MODEFigure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 show an example configuration of two MX3112 systems operating in copper mode that are connected in a back-to-back (bookend) configuration. The twelve DS1s are available for bonding together to carry Ethernet traffic. The bonding groups can each be provisioned with a specific number of DS1s.

Figure 3-1. Physical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in Copper Mode

Figure 3-2. Logical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in Copper Mode

(Copper/RT Mode)

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

(Copper/COT Mode)

12x DS1 12x DS1

DS1s DS1s

BondingEngine

BondingEngine

(a x DS1)

(b x DS1)

(c x DS1)

(d x DS1)

BondingGroups

For 1189901L1and L2

controllers(a+b+c+d) = up to 12

(Copper/RT Mode)10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet(Copper/COT Mode)

G1

G2

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

G1

G2

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4


Section 3, Application Guidelines - Bookend MX3112s - DS3 Mode

BOOKEND MX3112S - DS3 MODEFigure 3-3 and Figure 3-4 show an example configuration of two MX3112 systems operating in DS3 mode that are connected in a back-to-back (bookend) configuration. The channelized DS3 contains DS1 tributaries that can be bonded to carry Ethernet traffic, as well as, DS1 tributaries that are physically accessible from the amphenol connections on the chassis. The bonding groups can each be provisioned with a specific number of DS1s.

Figure 3-3. Physical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in DS3 Mode

Figure 3-4. Logical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in DS3 Mode

(DS3/RT Mode)

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

(DS3/COT Mode)

12x DS1 12x DS1

BondingEngine

n xDS1

n xDS1

DS3 DS3

BondingEngine

For 1189901L1 controllers, n = up to 12For 1189901L2 controllers, n = up to 16

12 X DS1(DS1 tributaries 1-12)

For 1189901L1 controllers(a+b+c+d) = up to 12

For 1189901L2 controllers(a+b+c+d) = up to 16

(a x DS1)

(b x DS1)

(c x DS1)

(d x DS1)

(DS1 tribuaries 13-28)

BondingGroups

(DS3/RT Mode)10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet(DS3/COT Mode)

P1

P2

P3

P4

G1

G2

G3

G4

G1

G2

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4



OPTI-6100 AND MX3112S (COPPER MODE AND DS3 MODE)Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6 show an example configuration of an OPTI-6100, containing a GEFM module, terminating the bonded DS1s of two MX3112 systems. One of the MX3112 systems operates in copper mode and the other operates in DS3 mode.

The GEFM module supports a Gigabit Ethernet interface and terminates up to 84 DS1s. The GEFM module supports 30 available bonding groups and can communicate with up to 20 individual MX3112 systems. Each bonding group can be provisioned with a specific number of DS1s. The 84 DS1s from the GEFM can be cross-connected within the OMM to any other module in the OPTI-6100 system. As shown in Figure 3-5, a TRAM module can provide DS3 access and a DS1VME module can provide direct DS1 access to the MX3112 systems.

Refer to the applicable OPTI-6100 documentation for how to provision the OPTI-6100.

Figure 3-5. Physical Configuration of OPTI-6100 and MX3112s

(DS3/RT Mode)

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

12x DS1

BondingEngine

n xDS1

DS3 DS3

For 1189901L1 controllers, n = up to 12For 1189901L2 controllers, n = up to 16

(Copper/RT Mode)

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

12x DS1DS1s DS1s

BondingEngine

84 xDS1

GigabitEthernet Cross-

Connect

VT1.5BondingEngine


Section 3, Application Guidelines - OPTI-6100 and MX3112s (Copper Mode and DS3 Mode)

Figure 3-6. Logical Configuration of OPTI-6100 and MX3112s

Equipment RequiredThe equipment needed for the OPTI-6100 and MX3112 configuration is listed in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1. Equipment Required - MX3112 Ethernet Transport Applications

Part Number Equipment Quantity

OPTI-6100 Equipment

1184501L1 OPTI-6100 MX Chassis 1

1184500L1 OPTI-6100 System Controller Module 1

1184504L3 OPTI-6100 OC-12 IR ADM Optical Multiplexer Module (OMM) (or equivalent)

1 (2 for redundancy)

1184532L1 OPTI-6100 Triple Transmux Tributary Module (TRAM) (or equivalent)

1 (2 for redundancy)

(a x DS1)

(b x DS1)

(c x DS1)

(d x DS1)

BondingGroups

(Copper/RT Mode) 10/100 Ethernet

G1

G2

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

(e x DS1)

(f x DS1)

(g x DS1)

(h x DS1)

(DS3/RT Mode) 10/100 Ethernet

12 x DS1

G1

G2

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

DS1 tributaries 1-12within the DS3

GigabitEthernet

G1

G2

G3

G4

G5

G6

G7

G8

Port

Cross-Connect

VT1.5



1184535L1 OPTI-6100 Gigabit Ethernet Over PDH Fiber Module (GEFM)

1

1184507L2 OPTI-6100 Enhanced Fan Assembly 1

MX3112 Equipment

1189001L1 MX3 Chassis 1

1189901L1 MX3112 Controller Card 1 (2 for redundancy)

1189902L1 MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module 1

1189007L1 MX3 Fan Module 1

Table 3-1. Equipment Required - MX3112 Ethernet Transport Applications

Part Number Equipment Quantity


Section 4Installation

INTRODUCTION

CAUTIONElectronic units can be damaged by ESD. When handling units, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to elec-tronic components. Place units in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on units, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

After unpacking the MX3112 system, inspect it for damage. If damage has occurred, file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service. Refer to “Appendix A, Warranty” for further information. If possible, keep the original shipping container to return the MX3112 system for repair or for verification of shipping damage.

Required Components• MX3 chassis (P/N 1189001L1)

• MX3112 controller card (P/N 1189901L1 or P/N 1189901L2)

• MX3 4-port 10/100Base-T Ethernet module (P/N 1189902L1)

• MX3 fan module (P/N 1189007L1)

• Mounting brackets and screws for 19-inch or 23-inch rack installation

• Ground lug with nut and lock washer

• Wire wrap post cover

• Power cover

C A U T I O N ! SUBJECT TO ELECTROSTATIC DAMAGE

OR DECREASE IN RELIABILITY.

HANDLING PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED.



Required Tools• Phillips head screwdriver

• Voltmeter

• Ohmmeter accurate to 0.1 ohm

INSTALLING THE MX3 CHASSISThe following sections detail the steps needed to install the MX3 chassis.

Rackmount InstallationFor a rackmount installation, perform the following steps:

1. Attach the mounting brackets to the side of the MX3 chassis using the two screws pro-vided for each bracket.

• For 19-inch rack applications, adjust the bracket so that the larger side of the bracket is flush to the chassis as shown in Figure 4-1. The direction of the bracket and the set of holes used is dependent on the mounting configuration (i.e. flush mount).

• For 23-inch rack applications, adjust the bracket so that the smaller side of the bracket is flush to the chassis as shown in Figure 4-2. The direction of the bracket and the set of holes used is dependent on the mounting configuration (i.e. flush mount).

2. Use the appropriate rack-type screws to mount the chassis into the rack.

Figure 4-1. 19-inch Rack Applications

A

B

FRONTBACK


Section 4, Installation - Installing the MX3 Chassis

Figure 4-2. 23-inch Rack Applications

WARNINGCare should be taken to not upset the stability of the equipment rack after installation is complete.

CAUTIONThe unit must be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC NFPA 70.

Power ConnectionsTo make the power connections for the MX3 chassis, perform the following steps:

1. Connect the frame ground from the frame ground lug on the rear panel of the MX3 chassis to the equipment rack grounding screw using appropriately sized wire that is at least the same gauge as the power wiring.

2. Test the frame ground connection to ensure proper ground. Using a multimeter set to its lowest resistance range, place one lead on the ground strap of the rack and the other on the chassis frame ground terminal. The reading should be less than 0.1 ohm. Readings greater than 0.1 ohm should be further investigated.

3. Make power connections to the MX3 chassis.

A

B

FRONTBACK



NOTEA readily accessible disconnect device, such as a rackmount fuse and alarm panel that is suitably approved and rated, should be incorporated into the fixed wiring. Connect to a reliably grounded –48 VDC or ±24 VDC source which is electrically isolated from the AC source. The branch circuit overcurrent protection should be a fuse or cir-cuit breaker rated –48 VDC, 1.5 amp slow-blow or ±24 VDC, 3 amp slow-blow.

a. Determine which fuse pairs are to supply power to the chassis.

b. Remove the fuses from the A and B slots for the pair.

c. Connect the ends of one wire between the “A” CO VDC supply and the PWR A terminal on the MX3 rear panel (see Figure 4-3).

d. Connect the three remaining wires in the same manner. Connect the “A” CO VDC return with RET A; “B” CO VDC supply with PWR B; and “B” CO VDC return with RET B.

Figure 4-3. Power Connector

4. Apply power and check voltages.

WARNINGInstalling fuses in the fuse and alarm panel at this stage will provide power to the chassis. There will be power to pins and connectors on the rear panel and inside the chassis. Exercise caution to avoid electrical shock.



a. Install appropriate fuses in the slots in the fuse and alarm panel that services the MX3 chassis (see Figure 4-4).

b. Using a voltmeter, place the common (normally black) lead on the RET A post of the DC power terminal block and the DC volts (normally red) lead on the PWR A post of the DC power terminal block. For a –48 VDC supply, the reading should be in the operating range of –42 VDC to –60 VDC. For a ±24 VDC supply, the reading should be in the range of ±22 VDC to ±27 VDC. Figure 4-3 illustrates the DC power connector and gives definitions for the connector symbols.

c. Repeat the above step for the RET/PWR B connections.

d. Remove the fuses from the fuse and alarm panel servicing the MX3 chassis.

e. Install the protective cover over the power terminal block.

Figure 4-4. Fuse and Alarm Panel



Rear Chassis ConnectionsThe MX3 chassis rear panel is equipped with the following:

1. Four sets of BNC connectors

2. Ethernet port

3. Wire-wrap pins for alarms (critical, major, and minor)

4. Wire-wrap pins for external auxiliary inputs

5. Two 64-pin female amphenol connectors

6. Terminal strip for DC power feed (A and B)

Figure 4-5 illustrates the rear panel and identifies the equipment using the numbered list above.

Figure 4-5. MX3 Chassis Rear View

WARNINGDo not metallically connect the DS3 (A-D), T/R (DSX-1), Alarm, and Ethernet interfaces to interfaces which connect to the Outside Plant (OSP) or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metal-lically to OSP wiring.

1. The ETHERNET port is an 8-pin modular connector that provides a 10/100Base-T Ethernet interface. For system management, use CAT 5 cable to connect from the Ethernet network into the female RJ-45 port labeled ETHERNET on the MX3 chassis rear panel.

2. The DSX-3 network interfaces are full-duplex circuits provided by eight BNC coaxial cable connections. Connect the DS3 interfaces to the BNC connector labeled A as needed for the MX3112 system. Connect the receive data from the network to the IN connectors. Connect the transmit data from the MX3 chassis to the OUT connectors.

NOTEDS3 interfaces must be connected using coaxial cables that have shields grounded at both ends.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.



3. The DSX-1 interfaces are 64-pin amphenol connectors. These interfaces provide Tx and Rx connections between the unit and equipment such as wire-wrap patch panels, punch-down panels, or breakout panels. Connect the DSX-1 interfaces to the 64-pin T/R (IN) and T/R (OUT) amphenol receptacles (female). The MX3112 system uses T/R (IN)/(OUT) amphenol connectors, pins 1-12 and 33-44, for DSX-1 ports 1-12 as shown in Table 4-1.

NOTEWhen looking at the back of the chassis, right exit cables are prepared to avoid conflict with the alarm/aux connections, the network management port connection, and the DS3 connections.

4. The alarm connectors connect to the three contacts of a relay on the main board of the MX3112 controller card. Connect the CRIT (critical), MAJOR, and MINOR alarm leads from the fuse and alarm panel to the Common (C), Normally Open (NO), and Normally Closed (NC) wire-wrap terminals on the MX3 chassis rear panel as required (see Figure 4-4).

5. Connect the AUX INPUTS (1-8) used by the MX3112 system for Auxiliary Alarms 1-4. These pins sense open and closed relay contacts. These pins are not polarity sensitive. Table 4-2 shows the pin assignments for the alarm inputs.

Table 4-1. Amphenol Connector Pin List

PinFunction

PinRing Tip

1 Ring 1 Tip 1 33

2 Ring 2 Tip 2 34

3 Ring 3 Tip 3 35

4 Ring 4 Tip 4 36

5 Ring 5 Tip 5 37

6 Ring 6 Tip 6 38

7 Ring 7 Tip 7 39

8 Ring 8 Tip 8 40

9 Ring 9 Tip 9 41

10 Ring 10 Tip 10 42

11 Ring 11 Tip 11 43

12 Ring 12 Tip 12 44

32 FGND FGND 64



NOTEEach of the alarm inputs default to a severity level of major. The severity level can be changed on the “Environmental Alarms Menu” on page 6-91. Any alarm input can also be assigned to function as an alarm cut-off (ACO).

6. After steps 4 and 5 have been completed, install the protective cover over the wire-wrap headers.

7. Power may now be applied to the chassis by installing appropriate fuses in the fuse and alarm panel that services the MX3 chassis.

Table 4-2. AUX Inputs 1 - 8 Pin List

AUX Inputs 1 - 8 Pin List

AUX Inputs Function

1,2 Alarm 1

3,4 Alarm 2

5,6 Alarm 3

7,8 Alarm 4


Section 4, Installation - Installing Cards and Modules

INSTALLING CARDS AND MODULESThe MX3112 system is designed with hot-swappable controller cards and modules. This section provides installation procedures for the different components of the MX3112 system.

• “Installing the Fan Module” on page 9

• “Installing the MX3112 Controller Card” on page 10

• “Installing the MX3ETH4 Module” on page 11

Installing the Fan ModuleThe MX3 fan module mounts in the MX3 chassis (P/N 1189001L1). Follow the steps listed below to install the MX3 fan module. Figure 4-6 illustrates the installation of the MX3 fan module.

1. With the screw oriented to the left, insert the MX3 fan module into the MX3 chassis until the MX3 fan module is properly seated in the backplane.

2. Using a flat or phillips-head screwdriver, tighten the screw to secure the MX3 fan module to the MX3 chassis.

Figure 4-6. MX3 Fan Module Installation



Installing the MX3112 Controller CardThis card occupies a controller slot in the MX3 chassis. Follow the steps listed below to install the MX3112 controller card. Figure 4-7 illustrates the installation of the MX3112 controller card.

1. If present, remove the blank plug (P/N 1189005L1) from the appropriate controller slot.

WARNINGFor configurations utilizing a single MX3112 controller card, a blank plug must be installed in the empty controller card slot.

2. Pull the ejector latches on the left and right sides of the controller card front panel from the latched or closed positions.

3. Gently, but firmly, slide the controller card into the upper (B) or lower (A) controller slot taking note of the left and right guide grooves in the chassis. Simultaneously, apply thumb pressure on the left (on the ADTRAN logo) and right (on the part number) of the controller card to ensure a good seat of the controller card pins into the backplane connector.

4. Push the ejector latches to the left/right against the front panel until they latch.

The MX3112 controller card initializes and begins a self-test upon insertion into an active MX3 chassis. When the self-test completes, the LEDs reflect the true state of the controller card.

Figure 4-7. MX3112 Controller Card Installation

B

A


Section 4, Installation - Installing Cards and Modules

Installing the MX3ETH4 ModuleThis module occupies expansion slot A in the MX3 chassis. Follow the steps listed to install the MX3ETH4 module. Figure 4-8 illustrates the installation of the MX3ETH4 module.

CAUTIONThe MX3ETH4 module is always installed in expansion slot A of the MX3 chassis.

1. If present, remove the blank plug (P/N 1189006L1) from the appropriate expansion slot.

2. Pull the ejector latch on the left side of the MX3ETH4 module front panel from the latched or closed position.

3. Gently, but firmly, slide the MX3ETH4 module into slot A taking note of the left and right guide grooves in the chassis. Simultaneously, apply thumb pressure on the left (on the ADTRAN logo) and right (to the right of PORT 4) of the MX3ETH4 module to ensure a good seat of the MX3ETH4 module pins into the backplane connector.

4. Push the ejector latch against the front panel until it latches.

Figure 4-8. MX3ETH4 Module Installation

Table 4-3 list the Ethernet pin assignments for ports 1 through 4.

B

A



Table 4-3. Ethernet Pin Assignments for Ports 1 - 4

Pin Function

1 TX+

2 TX–

3 RX+

4 NC

5 NC

6 RX–

7 NC

8 NC


Section 5Provisioning

INTRODUCTIONThis section provides provisioning defaults for copper mode and DS3 mode and provisioning options for the data path of the MX3112 system as follows:

• “Provisioning Defaults” on page 1

• “Data Path Provisioning” on page 5

PROVISIONING DEFAULTSTable 5-1 lists the MX3112 system default provisioning options for copper mode. Additional options are available when the application mode is set to DS3. Table 5-2 lists the default provisioning options for the additional DS3 options.

For detailed information on the MX3112 menus, refer to “Section 6, User Interface”.

Table 5-1. Default Provisioning Options

Provisioning Option Available Options Default Setting

Application Mode

COT/RT COT; RT RT

Copper/DS3 Copper; DS3 Copper

Auto-Provisioning Disabled; Enabled Enabled

DS1 Port Interfaces

State Disabled; Enabled Enabled

Line Length (feet) 0-133; 133-266; 266-899; 399-533; 533-655

0-133

Circuit Identifier User defined DS1 Port #

DS1 Bonding

Bonding Group 1 - 4 Disabled

Loopback Detect Disabled; CSU; NIU; FDL; CSU + FDL; NIU + FDL

Disabled



State IS; OOS IS

DS1 Timing Loop; Line; Local Loop

Bonding Groups

Skew Threshold (ms) Disabled; 1 to 16 ms 4

XCV Threshold Disabled; 1e-8; 1e-7; 1e-6; 1e-5; 1e-4; 1e-3

Disabled

Ethernet Client Ports

Ethernet State Disabled; Enabled Enabled

Provisioned Rate & Duplex Auto; 10, Half; 10, Full; 100, Half; 100, Full

Auto

Cross-Over Mode MDI; MDI-X; Auto Auto

Link Follows Group Status Disabled; Enabled Disabled

Traffic Classes

Queue Depth (packets) 1 to 100 50

Classification Mode Explicit; P-bit Explicit

General

Craft Port Baud Rate Auto; Disabled; 9600; 19200; 38400; 57600; 115200

Auto

Date MM/DD/YYYY N/A

Time HH:MM:SS (24 hour format) N/A

Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time Disabled; 1-Min; 5-Min; 10-Min; 15-Min; 30-Min; 45-Min; 60-Min

15-Min

System ID User defined System ID Not Set

Scheduled Card Reset MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS Disabled

Network Management

Management Mode Disabled; Local; VLAN Local

Management VLAN ID 1-4094 1

Management Port/Group Ports 1-4; Groups 1-4 Port 1

IP Address 0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask 0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 255.255.255.0

Gateway 0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 0.0.0.0

Table 5-1. Default Provisioning Options (Continued)



Section 5, Provisioning - Provisioning Defaults

Provisioned Rate & Duplex Auto; 10 Mbps Half Duplex; 10 Mbps Full Duplex; 100 Mbps Half Duplex; 100 Mbps Full Duplex

Auto

Cross-Over Mode MDI; MDI-X; Auto Auto

TL1 Telnet Port 1024-65535 2000

TL1 Raw-TCP Port 1024-65535 2001

Secondary Telnet Port 1024-65535 2002

TFTP Server 0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 0.0.0.0

SNMP

SNMP State Disabled; Enabled Disabled

SNMP Traps Disabled; Enabled Disabled

Trap Host 1 Status Valid; Under Creation; Invalid Invalid




System Location User Defined SysLocation Not Set

System Contact User Defined www.adtran.com

Read Community User Defined public

Write Community User Defined private

Test

DS1 Port # Test No Test; Analog Network; Digital Line; CSU Loopback; CSU LB w/ Pattern; NIU Loopback; NIU LB w/ Pattern; Pattern Test

No Test

Alarm Relay Test Status Inactive; Active Inactive

Test Timeout Disabled; 1 minute; 5 minutes; 10 minutes; 15 minutes; 30 minutes; 45 minutes; 60 minutes

5 minutes

Pattern QRSS; ALL ONES; ALL ZEROS; 2 IN 8 (2:6); 1 IN 8 (1:7); 2^15-1 INV

QRSS

System Alarms

Aux #1 - #4 Input Description

User defined AUX #1 - #4 INPUT, respectively

Aux #1 - #4 Input Level Disabled; Info; Alert; Minor; Major; Critical; ACO

Minor





PWR Bus A - B Input Level Disabled; Info; Alert; Minor; Major; Critical

Minor

Stand-by Controller Removed Level

Disabled; Info; Alert; Minor; Major; Critical

Minor

Alarm Chronology Ascending; Descending Ascending

Table 5-2. Additional Default Provisioning Options for DS3 Mode

Provisioning Option Available Options Default Settings

DS3 Interface

Tx Framing C-bit; M23 M23

Tx Clock Source Loop; Local Local

Loopback Detection Disabled; Enabled Enabled

DS3 Circuit Identifier User defined DS3 A

DS1 Port Interfaces

Line Coding AMI; B8ZS B8ZS

Loopback Detection Disabled; CSU; NIU Disabled

Test

DS3 Test No Test; Line Loopback; Digital Loopback; Remote Loopback; Remote ALL T1

No Test

DS1 # in DS3 Test No Test; Tributary Loopback; Remote Loopback; Remote Loopback w/ Pattern; CSU Loopback; CSU LB w/ Pattern; NIU Loopback; NIU LB w/ Pattern; Pattern Test

No Test




Section 5, Provisioning - Data Path Provisioning

DATA PATH PROVISIONINGThis section describes the general steps used to provision the data path of the MX3112 system.

The data path is provisioned in two primary steps.

1. Assign DS1s to bonding groups.

2. Provision flows to route traffic among the Ethernet client ports and bonding groups.

Use the Quick Setup menu to easily complete the first step (assigning DS1s to bonding groups).

Use the Packet Flows menu to complete the second step (provisioning flows). The process of adding, editing, and deleting flows from within this menu is designed to be fairly intuitive. Up to 100 flows can be provisioned.

• To edit or delete a flow, enter the number of the flow on the Packet Flows menu and hit enter. Apply changes or delete the flow using the Edit menu.

• To add a new flow, choose the option at the bottom of the Packet Flows menu labeled Add New Flow. This option displays a menu that is used to provision the parameters of the flow.

NOTEAfter making changes to the flow in the Packet Flows Add/Edit menu, select the Commit Flow option to apply the changes.

Description of Packet FlowsIn the context of the MX3112 system, a packet flow can be described as a unidirectional point-to-point data stream composed of packets that meet the same search criteria and are forwarded to a designated client Ethernet port or a bonding group.

When a packet arrives at the MX3112 system, either on a bonding group or on one of the client Ethernet ports, it must be matched up to a packet flow before it can be processed further. When a packet arrives, an examination is made of the source port or group on which the packet arrived and the VLAN ID (VID) in the topmost pre-existing VLAN tag in the packet, if such a tag exists. If the packet matches the corresponding fields in a provisioned flow definition, then the other fields in that flow definition are used to control what happens to that packet.

Possible actions performed on a packet include:

• Classifying the packet into a particular class of service (CoS) in order to affect its priority of transmission

• Manipulating the VLAN tag information on the packet

• Potentially dropping the packet if the flow has exceeded preset rate limits

• Transmitting the packet out a defined destination port or group

If an incoming packet matches none of the flow definitions, it is dropped.

In the following sections, examples are provided to describe the functionality behind the parameters of a flow.



Example 1In this example, three DS1s are assigned to bonding group 1, and flows are provisioned to conduct traffic between Ethernet port 1 and bonding group 1.

The Quick Setup menu, as shown in Figure 5-1, illustrates the assignments of the DS1s to bonding groups.

Figure 5-1. Quick Setup Menu for Example 1

The Packet Flows menu, as shown in Figure 5-2, contains two provisioned flows that allow traffic to be routed between Ethernet port 1 and bonding group 1.

Figure 5-2. Packet Flows Menu for Example 1



MX3112->Quick Setup


1 - COT/RT : COT 13 - 13 1

2 - Copper/DS3 : DS3 14 - 14 1

3 - Auto-Provisioning : Enabled 15 - 15 1

16 - 16 Disabled

Ethernet Client Ports 17 - 17 Disabled

4 - Select Ethernet Client Ports 18 - 18 Disabled

5 - Packet Flows 19 - 19 Disabled

20 - 20 Disabled

System 21 - 21 Disabled

6 - Management Mode : VLAN 501, Group 1 22 - 22 Disabled

7 - IP Address : 10.100.51.94 23 - 23 Disabled

8 - Subnet Mask : 255.255.0.0 24 - 24 Disabled

9 - Gateway : 10.100.51.254

10 - Date : 01/01/2005

11 - Time : 12:00:00

12 - System ID : Site 1 MX3112





Page 1 of 1

Src Dest



1 - P1 - 4500 No Limit 3 G1 None - -

2 - G1 - 0 No Limit 3 P1 None - -

----------------------------->> END OF FLOW LIST <<----------------------------


Selection:




In Figure 5-2, the flow definition number 1 matches packets that arrive on client Ethernet port 1 with any VID or no VLAN tag at all. The source port/group and the source VID are the match fields.

The rest of the flow definition details the actions that will be performed on packets that match this definition.

• The Committed Rate is the bit rate that the MX3112 system will always attempt to reserve for this flow in the port or group to which the packets of the flow are forwarded (G1 in this case).

• The Burst Rate is the maximum allowed average bit rate for this flow.

• The CoS Class field specifies that all packets that match this flow will be explicitly classified into class number 3, which is the lowest of the three available explicit priority classes.

• The Dest Port/Group value specifies that all packets in this flow will exit on bonding group 1.

In the case of this example, bonding group 1 is provisioned with three DS1s, which equates to an available data rate of approximately 4500 kbps. Since this is the only flow with packets destined for that bonding group, the committed rate is set to match that available rate. Since there are no other flows competing for the bandwidth, the burst rate is left at its default of no limit.

The last three fields specify the tag manipulation that will be performed on the packets in this flow. In this case, the value is none, so the last two fields are not used. This flow essentially takes all packets arriving on client Ethernet port 1 and transmits them out on bonding group 1.

In Figure 5-2, The flow definition number 2 works the same way, except in the reverse direction. In this case, the committed rate has been left as the default of 0, because the source bonding group bandwidth of 4500 kbps will never be able to exceed the available bandwidth of the Ethernet port (10000 kbps or 100000 kbps). In this case, rate limiting should never occur. This flow essentially takes all packets arriving on bonding group 1 and transmits them out on client Ethernet port 1.



Example 2In this example, all twelve DS1s are assigned to bonding group 1, and flows are provisioned for bonding group 1 to conduct traffic for Ethernet ports 1 and 2.

The Quick Setup menu, as shown in Figure 5-3, illustrates the assignments of all twelve DS1s to bonding group 1.

Figure 5-3. Quick Setup Menu for Example 2

The Packet Flows menu, as shown in Figure 5-4, contains six provisioned flows that allow traffic on Ethernet ports 1 and 2 to be conducted over bonding group 1. Use the VLAN tags to distinguish the traffic within bonding group 1, and use the class of service options to help prioritize the traffic.



MX3112->Quick Setup


1 - COT/RT : COT 13 - 13 1

2 - Copper/DS3 : DS3 14 - 14 1


16 - 16 1




20 - 20 1

System 21 - 21 1

6 - Management Mode : VLAN 501, Group 1 22 - 22 1

7 - IP Address : 10.100.51.94 23 - 23 1

8 - Subnet Mask : 255.255.0.0 24 - 24 1

9 - Gateway : 10.100.51.254

10 - Date : 01/01/2005

11 - Time : 12:00:00





Figure 5-4. Packet Flows Menu for Example 2

In this example, all twelve of the available bonded DS1s have been combined into a single bonding group (group number 1), providing a combined available bandwidth of about 18 Mbps. This allows the various traffic flows to cross utilize bandwidth, meaning that any of the traffic flows can temporarily burst into the bandwidth unused by the other flows on that group. Since Ethernet traffic is typically bursty, this allows more efficient use of the limited TDM channels.

Flow definition number 1 matches any packets entering client Ethernet port 1 with a VID of 101 and transmits them out on group 1. The committed and burst rates have been set so that the product will always attempt to reserve 2000 kbps for this flow, but will allow it to burst up to 18000 kbps (the entire group capacity) temporarily if the bandwidth is available. The class of service has been set to the middle priority, 2. Finally, a VLAN tag will be added to all the packets in this flow. The new tag will be pushed or stacked, in addition, to the pre-existing tag, the one with the VID of 101. This new tag is specified to have a VID of 1. Since each VLAN tag also needs a priority value, the New Prio field specifies a value of 7 for the priority field in the new tag. The reciprocal flow to this one, the one that handles packets coming back the other way, is flow number 4. Flow definition number 4 matches packets received on group 1 with a VID of 1 in the top tag, pops (removes) that tag, and sends the packet out port 1.

Flow definition number 2 also looks for packets coming in on port 1, but this flow matches packets with a VID of 227. This flow behaves much like flow definition number 1, but there are a few differences. It has a higher committed rate, so it will be allowed more bandwidth in the bonding group. It also has a higher priority CoS class (1 instead of 2), so the packets in this flow will be prioritized ahead of the ones from flow definition number 1. Finally, this flow does a VLAN tag swap instead of a push. It removes the existing tag and replaces it with a new one, which has a VID of 3. For the priority field, this flow definition has the instruction to inherit the priority value from the existing VLAN tag, the one that is being removed. The “(7)” part of that field specifies a default priority value which would be used if we were operating on untagged traffic, thus no existing priority to inherit. Flow definition number 6 is the reciprocal flow for flow definition number 2.




Page 1 of 1

Src Dest



1 - P1 101 2000 10000 2 G1 Push 1 7

2 - P1 227 8000 10000 1 G1 Swap 3 Inh(7)

3 - P2 - 8000 10000 3 G1 Push 2 4

4 - G1 1 0 No Limit 3 P1 Pop - -

5 - G1 2 0 No Limit 3 P2 Pop - -

6 - G1 3 0 No Limit 3 P1 Swap 227 Inh(7)

----------------------------->> END OF FLOW LIST <<----------------------------


Selection:

(N)ext (P)revious (F)irst (L)ast (S)ort (Q)uick-Set Legend: G = Group P = Por



Flow definition number 3 matches all packets arriving on port 2 and transmits them on group 1, adding a new VLAN tag with VID 1, priority 4. This flow has a CoS class of 3, so it will be prioritized behind the other two flows exiting on group 1. Flow definition number 5 is the reciprocal flow.

For the device, on the other end of the bonded channel, to be able to distinguish between different flows traveling in the same group, a unique VID must exist on the packet of each flow. This unique VID can be provided by a tag that is added within the MX3112 system, or it can be the VID of the pre-existing tag. Either way, the VID of the top tag is the only way the other device can tell the difference between those packets and perform the appropriate action. Also, the New Prio field does not affect the actual prioritization of the packet by the MX3112 system. That is controlled by the CoS Class field. The New Prio field only controls the p-bit priority value that will be placed into a new VLAN tag.


Section 6User Interface

INTRODUCTIONThis section provides detailed information on the following:

• “System Management” on page 6-1

• “Network Management” on page 6-3

• “Logging on to the MX3112 System” on page 6-10

• “Menu Structure” on page 6-11

• “Menu Navigation” on page 6-12

• “Menu Trees” on page 6-12

• “Menu Descriptions” on page 6-47

SYSTEM MANAGEMENTMX3112 system management and provisioning is facilitated by a series of intuitive menus that are accessible on a computer screen. The MX3112 system provides two methods for management access.

• “Craft Interface” on page 6-1

• “Remote Menu” on page 6-2

Craft InterfaceConnect to the MX3112 system menus through the DB-9 connector, labeled CRAFT, on the front of the MX3112 controller card (see Figure 6-1). A DB-9 straight-through cable is required.

Figure 6-1. Craft Connection

B

A

Craft Connection



Most personal computers or laptops can run communications software that emulates a VT100 terminal. Windows programs such as Terminal or HyperTerminal are two such examples in the Windows format, but there are many other adequate, commercially available software packages, virtually all of which allow the PC or laptop to emulate a VT100 terminal. Certain configuration items must be set on a PC or laptop to act as a VT100 terminal for the MX3112 system.

1. Set the parameters of the communications software to the following settings:

• 115200 baud rate or less

• 8 data bits

• No parity

• 1 stop bit

• No flow control

2. Set the PC for direct connect on the appropriate communications port (as opposed to dial up connection).

3. Plug the male end of the data cable into the MX3112 controller card. Make connection to the PC or laptop as appropriate for the equipment.

Remote MenuThe MX3112 system allows remote operation by remotely opening a VT100 menu session to a far end RT system from within a menu session of an associated near end COT system. The COT system, in this case, can be an OPTI-6100 GEFM module or a MX3112 system. The menu access to the RT system is available regardless of how the management mode option is provisioned. Establish a remote menu session to the RT system via the Remote Management menu of the COT system as shown in Figure 6-2. Refer to “Remote Management Menu” on page 6-208 for more details.

Figure 6-2. Remote Management Menu



MX3112->Remote Menu Access

1 - MX3112 REMOTE [Critical]



Section 6, User Interface - Network Management

NETWORK MANAGEMENTThe MX3112 system supports a management mode option that controls the interface from which Ethernet connectivity is established for managing the system. This option has the following possible settings:

• Disabled: The system cannot be managed via Ethernet. Management connectivity is supported only via craft interface and the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only). The chassis Ethernet port is disabled.

• Local: Management connectivity is supported via the craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or via Ethernet from the chassis 10/100 Ethernet port.

• VLAN: Management connectivity is supported via craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or via Ethernet from a VLAN on a designated bonding group or a customer 10/100 port. The chassis Ethernet port is disabled.

The default value for the management mode is local. When the management mode is set for VLAN, the unit must be provisioned with a valid IP address, gateway address, and subnet mask as would normally be required when the system is managed via the chassis Ethernet port (management mode = local).

Some restrictions are enforced for the purposes of guaranteeing that the VLAN designated for management does not conflict with customer Ethernet traffic having the same VLAN ID.

• No flows may exist in which either the source VID or the new VID equals the provisioned management VLAN ID.

• Any traffic that is received on a bonding group or customer Ethernet port other than the selected management port/group that contains a top VLAN tag with the management VLAN ID will be discarded.

The management mode option is available from within the Quick Setup menu as shown in Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3. Quick Setup Menu



MX3112->Quick Setup


1 - COT/RT : RT 13 - 1 1

2 - Copper/DS3 : Copper 14 - 2 1


16 - 4 2




20 - 8 3

System 21 - 9 3

6 - Management Mode : VLAN 1, Group 1 22 - 10 4

7 - IP Address : 10.100.51.95 23 - 11 4

8 - Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 24 - 12 4

9 - Gateway : 10.100.51.254

10 - Date : 01/01/2005

11 - Time : 12:00:00





Selecting the management mode option navigates the user to the menu shown in Figure 6-4, where three options are presented:

• Management Mode

• Management VLAN/ID

• Management Port/Group

The management VLAN ID and the management port/group options are meaningful only when the management mode option is provisioned to VLAN.

Figure 6-4. Management Mode Menu



MX3112->Quick Setup->Management Mode

1 - Management Mode : VLAN

Options for VLAN Management

2 - Management VLAN ID : 501

3 - Management Port/Group : Group 1

The Management VID may not equal the source VID or new VID of any flows




Figure 6-5 illustrates the selection menu for the management mode option. The user is restricted from selecting the VLAN option if the provisioned management VLAN ID value conflicts with any existing flows.

Figure 6-5. Management Mode Selection Menu

Figure 6-6 illustrates the selection menu for the management VLAN ID option. When the management mode option is set for VLAN, the user is restricted from entering a value that conflicts with any existing flows. The value range is 1-4094.

Figure 6-6. Management VLAN ID Menu



Management Mode : VLAN

1 - Disabled

2 - Local

3 - VLAN





Management VLAN ID : 501

Enter Management VLAN ID:


'?' - System Help Screen



Figure 6-6 illustrates the selection menu for the management port/group option. The VLAN management interface may be either a bonding group or a customer 10/100 port.

Figure 6-7. Management Port/Group Menu



Management Port/Group : Group 1

1 - Port 1

2 - Port 2

3 - Port 3

4 - Port 4

5 - Group 1

6 - Group 2

7 - Group 3

8 - Group 4




Example 1Figure 6-8 illustrates how a remote MX3112 system could be managed by VLAN 501 through a single GEFM. The GEFM is provisioned with flows to route the VLAN between the Gigabit Ethernet port and the bonding group, treating it similarly to any other customer data. To guarantee sufficient Class of Service (CoS) on the management VLAN, it is recommended that the flows within the GEFM employ available methods to assign this VLAN sufficient bandwidth and CoS relative to other existing flows.

The management mode option of the remote MX3112 system is VLAN.

Figure 6-8. VLAN-Based Management of a Remote MX3112 through a GEFM

10/100 10/100

V101

V501Bonding

Group(n x DS1)

GigE

V501ROUTER

V101

V101



Example 2Figure 6-9 illustrates how a remote MX3112 system can be managed by VLAN 501 through two separate GEFM modules. The two GEFM modules can reside in the same OPTI-6100 system (see Figure 6-9) or the two modules can reside in separate systems. A bonding group of one or more DS1s is used to route the traffic between the two GEFM modules. Each GEFM is provisioned with flows to route this VLAN between the Gigabit Ethernet port and the bonding groups as shown in Figure 6-9, treating it similarly to any other customer data. To guarantee sufficient CoS on the management VLAN, it is recommended that the flows within the GEFM employ available methods to assign this VLAN sufficient bandwidth and CoS relative to other existing flows.

The management mode option of the remote MX3112 system is VLAN.

Figure 6-9. VLAN-Based Management of a Remote MX3112 through Two GEFMs

10/100 10/100

V101

V101

V501

V501

BondingGroup

(n x DS1)

BondingGroup

(n x DS1)

GigE

V501

GigE

V501ROUTER



Example 3Figure 6-10 illustrates how two MX3112 systems can be managed by two separate VLANs, VIDs 501 and 502. The COT MX3112 system is provisioned with flows to route VLAN 501 between one of its client 10/100 Ethernet ports and one of the bonding groups as shown in Figure 6-10, treating this VLAN similarly to any other customer data. To guarantee sufficient CoS for VLAN 501, it is recommended that the flows within the COT MX3112 employ available methods to assign this VLAN sufficient bandwidth and CoS relative to other existing flows.

The management mode option for both MX3112 systems is VLAN.

Figure 6-10. VLAN-Based Management of Local and Remote MX3112s

ROUTER

V501Bonding

Group(n x DS1)

V501

V502

V502

10/100channel

Client 10/100Channels

Client 10/100

Channel



LOGGING ON TO THE MX3112 SYSTEMTo log on to the MX3112 system, perform the following steps:

1. Establish the physical connection to the MX3112 system using one of the options dis-cussed in “System Management” on page 6-1.

2. If a craft port session is being used, proceed to step 3. If using a Telnet menu session proceed to step 4.

3. Press ENTER until the logon prompt appears.

NOTEThe MX3112 system requires the user ID and associated password.

4. Enter the default user ID, “ADMIN” (or the configured logon name with System Administrator privileges), and press ENTER.

5. Enter the default password, “PASSWORD” (or the configured password), and press ENTER.

NOTELogon name and password fields are case sensitive. The default values are all uppercase.

NOTEIf your username and/or password are forgotten, Adtran Tech Support can assist with logon.


Section 6, User Interface - Menu Structure

MENU STRUCTUREThe MX3112 controller card provides a menu system for the entire MX3112 system. All system-related menus are controlled by the controller card. This subsection explains the methods used to navigate the MX3112 system menus.

NOTETo view the MX3112 system menu trees, refer to “Menu Trees” on page 6-12.

The menu structure for the MX3112 system is a layered menu tree. Each layer of the menu tree is displayed as a menu or a screen.

MenuA menu is a display that provides numbered selections that are used to navigate to related menus, modify provisioning information, or display information screens. A menu can contain the following objects:

• Menu Option: A menu option is indicated by a number, which when selected navigates the display to another menu layer or is used to change the option setting.

• Read-only Field: A read-only field displays information that cannot be changed. The information displayed in a read-only field can be static or can be automatically updated by the MX3112 system.

• Read-write Field: A read-write field displays information that when selected can be modified.

• Keyboard Commands: A hot key is a key or combination of keys that are assigned to a function (see Table 6-1). Hot keys are indicated by the required key(s) and a brief description (i.e., CTRL+A - acknowledge all alarms).

ScreenA screen is a display that usually indicates the end of a menu tree path. A screen can contain the following objects:

• Read-only Field: A read-only field displays information that cannot be changed. The information displayed in a read-only field can be static or can be automatically updated by the MX3112 system.

• Read-write Field: A read-write field displays information that when selected can be modified.

• Keyboard Commands: A hot key is a key or combination of keys that are assigned to a function (see Table 6-1). Hot keys are indicated by the required key(s) and a brief description (i.e., CTRL+A - acknowledge all alarms).



MENU NAVIGATIONBasic menu navigation is accomplished by selecting the desired option number and then pressing ENTER. To work backward through the menus press the ESC (escape) key. To access the System Help screen, press the question mark (?) key.

Table 6-1 displays the general keyboard commands for the MX3112 system. The System Help screen can be accessed from any MX3112 screen or menu by pressing “?”.

MENU TREESThis subsection provides a detailed set of menu trees for the MX3112 system. The menu trees are maps that can be used to locate provisioning options with ease. Some of the menu trees span multiple pages, signified by the “(continued)” at the end of the illustration title.

The MX3112 system menu trees are divided by two application modes.

• “Copper Mode” on page 6-13

• “DS3 Mode” on page 6-28

Table 6-1. MX3112 Keyboard Commands

Keyboard Command Description

BACKSPACE This keyboard command is used to delete the character to left of the cursor during keyboard input.

ENTER (or Return) This keyboard command is used to terminate input.

ESC (Escape) This keyboard command is used to back up to the previous menu and used to clear prompts.

CTRL+A (Control and a) This keyboard command is used to acknowledge all alarms

CTRL+C/D (Control and c or d) This keyboard command is used to logout and disconnect.

CTRL+R (Control and r) This keyboard command is used to refresh the display.

CTRL+Z (Control and z) This keyboard command is used to exit from module menus.


Section 6, User Interface - Menu Trees

Copper Mode

Figure 6-11. MX3112 Main Menu Tree - Copper Mode

MX3112 Main Menu

1. Configuration

2. Provisioning

3. Quick Setup

4. Status

5. Test

8. Remote Management

9. or 10. Logout 2

A

B

C

D

E

7. System AlarmsG

8. or 9. Firmware Upgrade 1H

6. Performance MonitoringF

12

Denotes that this item only appears when COT is selected in the Application Mode.Appears as option 8 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 9 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.Appears as option 9 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 10 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.



Figure 6-12. Configuration and Provisioning Menu Trees - Copper Mode

A

1. COT/RT

2. Copper/DS3

3. Auto-Provisioning

Controller A/B

CLEI Code

Part Number

Serial Number

MAC Address

Product Revision

Code Version

Code Checksum

1. COT

2. RT

1. Copper

2. DS3

1. Disabled

2. EnabledB

Boot Version

Boot Checksum

1. Application Mode

I

2. DS1 Port Interfaces

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

13. Copy Provisioning to Multiple

1. State

2. Line Length (feet)

3. Circuit Identifier

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. 0-133

2. 133-266

3. 266-399

4. 399-533

5. 533-655

1. Copy FROM DS1 Port

Line Length (feet)

Loopback Detection

2. First DS1 Port to Copy TO

3. Last DS1 Port to Copy TO

4. Copy Provisioning

State

Denotes that this item only appears when RT is selected in the Application Mode.



Figure 6-12. Configuration and Provisioning Menu Trees - Copper Mode (Continued)

I

3. DS1 Bonding

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

13. DS1 Timing

1. Bonding Group

2. Loopback Detect1. Disabled

2. CSU

3. NIU

4. FDL

5. CSU + FDL

6. NIU + FDL

1. Loop

2. Line

3. Local

J

4. Bonding Groups1. - 4. Bonding Group 1 - 4

1. Skew Threshold (ms)

2. XCV Threshold1. Disabled

2. 1e-8

3. 1e-7

4. 1e-6

5. 1e-5

6. 1e-4

7. 1e-3

3. State1. IS

2. OOS

1. DS1 Timing Mode

14. Link Identifiers

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

13. Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs


1. Sent Link ID

Received Link ID

2. Expected Link ID

3. Set Expected Equal to Received

1. No Action

2. Alarm Only

3. Alarm + Link Drop

3. Remote Auto-Provisioned Group

Denotes that this item only appears when COT is selected in the Application Mode.




J

K

5. Packet Flows1. Add New Flow 1

1. Source Port/Group

2. Source VID

3. Committed Rate (kbps)

4. Burst Rate (kbps)

5. Class Of Service 2

6. Dest Port/Group

7. Tag Manipulation

12. Delete Flow 4

1. Port 1

2. Port 2

3. Port 3

4. Port 4

5. Group 1

6. Group 2

7. Group 3

8. Group 4

1. 1

2. 2

3. 3

1. Port 1

2. Port 2

3. Port 3

4. Port 4

5. Group 1

6. Group 2

7. Group 3

8. Group 4

1. None

2. Push

3. Pop

4. Swap

23

This option only appears when Explicit is selected in the Classification Mode.These options only appear when Push or Swap is selected in the Tag Manipulation. Option 10 is Default Priority when selecting an existing flow.

8. New VID 3

9. Priority Inheritance 3

10. New Priority 3

11. Commit Flow

4 This option only appears when selecting an existing flow.

1 This option number increases or decreases by one as each flow is added or deleted.




K

L

6. Ethernet Client Ports1. - 4. Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4

1. Ethernet State

2. Provisioned Rate & Duplex

Functional Rate & Duplex

3. Cross-Over Mode

4. Link Follows Group Status

Link Status

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Auto

2. 10, Half

3. 10, Full

4. 100, Half

5. 100, Full

1. MDI

2. MDI-X

3. Auto

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

8. Equipment Protection1. Perform Manual Switch

7. Traffic Classes

1. - 3. Traffic Class 1 - 3 1

4. Classification Mode1. Explicit

2. P-Bit

Enter Queue Depth (packets)

1. - 8. P-bit Priority 0 - 7 2


2 These options only appear when P-Bit is selected in the Classification Mode.1 These options only appear when Explicit is selected in the Classification Mode.




L

9. General

1. Craft Port Baud Rate

Functional Baud Rate

2. Date

3. Time

4. Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time

5. System ID

6. Scheduled Card Reset

7. Card Reset

8. Restore Default Provisioning

1. Auto

2. Disabled

5. 38400

6. 57600

7. 115200

3. 9600

4. 19200

1. Disabled

4. 10-Min

5. 15-Min

2. 1-Min

3. 5-Min

7. 45-Min

8. 60-Min

6. 30-Min

11. Save Provisioning

12. Auto Save1. Disabled

2. Enabled

13. Security Administration

14. Change ADMIN’s Password

1. Users Currently Logged On

2. Edit User Accounts

3. Access Tech Support Account

4. Restore Default Security Settings

1. ADMIN

2. READONLY

3. READWRITE

4. TEST

1. Enable/Disable User Account

2. Access Rights

3. Change Password

4. Delete User

1. READ

2. TEST

3. READ/WRITE

4. ADMIN

10. Network ManagementM



Figure 6-12. Network Management Menu Tree - Copper Mode

1. Management Mode

2. IP Address

3. Subnet Mask

4. Gateway

MAC Address

5. TFTP Server

6. Rear Ethernet Interface

7. Network Service Ports

8. SNMP

1. Management Mode

2. Management VLAN ID

3. Management Port/Group

1. Disabled

2. Local

3. VLAN

1. - 4. Port 1 - 4

5. - 8. Group 1 - 4



2. Cross-Over Mode

Link Status

2. 10 Mbps Half Duplex

3. 10 Mbps Full Duplex

1. Auto



1. MDI

2. MDI-X

3. Auto

1. TL1 Telnet Port

2. TL1 Raw-TCP Port

3. Secondary Telnet Port

1. SNMP State1. Disabled

2. Enabled

2. SNMP Traps1. Disabled

2. Enabled

3. - 6. Trap Host 1 - 4

1. Status1. Valid

2. Under Creation

3. Invalid2. IP

3. Version1. Version 1

2. Version 24. Confirmation Timeout (sec)

5. Confirmation Retries7. System ID

8. System Location

9. System Contact

10. Read Community

11. Write Community

M

Denotes that these items only appear when Valid or Under Creation is selected in the Status.



Figure 6-13. Quick Setup Menu Tree - Copper Mode

C

1. COT/RT

2. Copper/DS3


3. or 4. Select Ethernet Client Ports 1

5. or 6. Management Mode 1

6. or 7. IP Address 1

7. or 8. Subnet Mask 1

8. or 9. Gateway 1

9. or 10. Date 1

10. or 11. Time 1

11. or 12. System ID 1

12. or 13. - 23. or 24. DS1 Port 1 - 12 1

1. COT

2. RT

1. Copper

2. DS3

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Ethernet State



3. Cross-Over Mode


Link Status

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Auto

2. 10, Half

3. 10, Full

4. 100, Half

5. 100, Full

1. MDI

2. MDI-X

3. Auto

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. - 4. Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4

4. or 5. Packet Flows 1 (Same As Provisioning\Packet Flows)

1Denotes that this item only appears when RT is selected in the Application Mode.Option # is dependent on whether COT or RT is selected in the Application Mode.

1. Management Mode



1. Disabled

2. Local

3. VLAN

1. - 4. Port 1 - 4

5. - 8. Group 1 - 4



Figure 6-14. Status and Test Menu Trees - Copper Mode

D

1. Controller Equipment

2. Environmental Alarms

3. Ethernet Client Ports

4. DS1 Ports

5. Bonding Group Status

E

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

14. Test Alarm Relays

15. Reset ALL Tests

1. No Test

3. Digital Line

4. CSU Loopback

5. CSU LB w/ Pattern

6. NIU Loopback

7. NIU LB w/ Pattern

2. Analog Network

8. Pattern Test

1. Alarm Relay Test Status1. Inactive

2. Active

16. Test Timeout

17. Pattern

1. Disabled

2. 1 minute

3. 5 minutes

4. 10 minutes

5. 15 minutes

6. 30 minutes

7. 45 minutes

8. 60 minutes

1. QRSS

2. ALL ONES

3. ALL ZEROS

4. 2 IN 8 (2:6)

5. 1 IN 8 (1:7)

6. 2^15-1 INV

13. Bonding DS1s1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

1. No Test

3. Payload

2. Line



Figure 6-15. Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - Copper Mode

F

1. DS1 Port Statistics

2. DS1 Bonding Statistics

3. Bonding Group Statistics

4. Ethernet Client Statistics

5. Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset ALL PM Data

7. Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults

8. Enable ALL PM Thresholds

9. Disable ALL PM Thresholds

N

O

P

Q



Figure 6-16. DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode

1. - 12. DS1 #1 - #12 [PM Data]

13. Reset ALL DS1 Port Current Interval PM Data

14. Reset ALL DS1 Port PM Data

15. Reset ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

16. Enable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

17. Disable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

1. Near End Daily

2. Near End Quarter Hourly

3. Near End Daily Thresholds

4. Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds

5. Reset DS1 # Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset DS1 # PM Data

1. CV-L

2. ES-L

3. SES-L

4. LOSS-L

1. CV-L

2. ES-L

3. SES-L

4. LOSS-L

5. Reset selected DS1 Thresholds to Defaults

6. Enable selected DS1 Thresholds

7. Disable selected DS1 Thresholds

1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

N



Figure 6-17. DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode

1. - 12. DS1 #1 - #12 [PM Data]

13. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data

14. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data

15. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

16. Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

17. Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

1. Near End Daily


3. Far End Daily

4. Far End Quarter Hourly



7. Far End Daily Thresholds

8. Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds



1. CV-P

2. ES-P

3. SES-P

4. UAS-P

1. CV-PFE

2. ES-PFE

3. SES-PFE

4. UAS-PFE

1. CV-P

2. ES-P

3. SES-P

4. UAS-P




1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. CV-PFE

2. ES-PFE

3. SES-PFE

4. UAS-PFE




1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

O



Figure 6-18. Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode

1. Daily Performance

2. Quarter Hourly Performance

3. Daily Thresholds

4. Quarter Hourly Thresholds

5. Reset Bonding Group # Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset Bonding Group # PM Data

1. Rx Frames

2. Rx Bytes

3. Rx Errored Events

5. Tx Bytes

1. Rx Frames

2. Rx Bytes

3. Rx Error Events

5. Tx Bytes

6. Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

7. Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

8. Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. - 4. Bonding Group 1 - 4

5. Reset ALL Bonding Group Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset ALL Bonding Group PM Data




4. Tx Frames

4. Tx Frames

P



Figure 6-19. Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode



3. Daily Thresholds


5. Reset Ethernet Port # Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset Ethernet Port # PM Data

1. Rx Packets

2. Rx Octets

3. Rx CRC & Align Errors

8. Tx Octets

1. Rx Packets

2. Rx Octets


8. Tx Octets

9. Reset Thresholds to Defaults for selected Port

10. Enable Thresholds for selected Port

11. Disable Thresholds for selected Port

1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. - 4. Ethernet Port 1 - 4

5. Reset ALL Ethernet Client Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset ALL Ethernet Client PM Data

7. Reset ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

8. Enable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

9. Disable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

4. Rx Undersize Packets


5. Rx Oversize Packets

6. Rx Collisions


6. Rx CollisionsQ

7. Tx Packets

7. Tx Packets



Figure 6-20. System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - Copper Mode

G

1. Master Log

2. Controller A

Controller B

3. User-Definable Alarms

4. Alarm Chronology


2. Stand-by Controller Removed Level

1. - 4. Aux #1 - 4 Input

5. - 6. PWR Bus A/B Input

1. AUX # Input Description

2. AUX # Input Level1. Disabled

2. Info

3. Alert

4. Minor

5. Major

6. Critical

7. ACO

1. PWR A/B FAIL Level1. Disabled

2. Info

3. Alert

4. Minor

5. Major

6. Critical

1. Disabled

2. Info

3. Alert

4. Minor

5. Major

6. Critical

1. Ascending

2. Descending

H

Controller A

Controller B

1. Y-Modem

2. TFTP

3. Reset Active Controller

1. TFTP Server

2. Remote Filename

3. Initiate Transfer



DS3 Mode

Figure 6-21. MX3112 Main Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

MX3112 Main Menu

1. Configuration

2. Provisioning

3. Quick Setup

4. Status

5. Test

8. Remote Management

9. or 10. Logout 2

A

B

C

D

E

7. System AlarmsG

8. or 9. Firmware Upgrade 1H

6. Performance MonitoringF

12

Denotes that this item only appears when COT is selected in the Application Mode.Appears as option 8 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 9 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.Appears as option 9 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 10 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.



Figure 6-22. Configuration and Provisioning Menu Trees - DS3 Mode

A

1. COT/RT

2. Copper/DS3


Controller A/B

CLEI Code

Part Number

Serial Number

MAC Address

Product Revision

Code Version

Code Checksum

1. COT

2. RT

1. Copper

2. DS3

1. Disabled

2. EnabledB

Boot Version

Boot Checksum

1. Application Mode

2. DS3 Interface

1. Tx Framing

2. Tx Clock Source

3. Loopback Detection

4. DS3 Circuit Identifier

5. DS3 Equipment Identifier

1. C-Bit

2. M23

1. Loop

2. Local

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Near End Facility ID Code

2. Near End Location ID Code

3. Near End Frame ID Code

4. Near End Unit Code

5. Near End Equipment Code

Far End Facility ID Code

Far End Location ID Code

Far End Frame ID Code

Far End Unit Code

Far End Equipment CodeI

Denotes that this item only appears when RT is selected in the Application Mode.



Figure 6-22. Configuration and Provisioning Menu Trees - DS3 Mode (Continued)

I

3. DS1 Port Interfaces

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

13. Copy Provisioning to Multiple

1. State

2. Line Length (feet)

3. Line Coding

4. Loopback Detection

5. Circuit Identifier

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. 0-133

2. 133-266

3. 266-399

4. 399-533

5. 533-655

1. AMI

2. B8ZS

1. Disabled

2. CSU

3. NIU

1. Copy FROM DS1 Port

Line Length (feet)

Line Coding

Loopback Detection

2. First DS1 Port to Copy TO

3. Last DS1 Port to Copy TO

4. Copy Provisioning

J

State




J

K

3. DS1 Bonding

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

13. DS1 Timing

1. Bonding Group

2. Loopback Detect1. Disabled

2. CSU

3. NIU

4. FDL

5. CSU + FDL

6. NIU + FDL

1. Loop

2. Line

3. Local

3. State1. IS

2. OOS

1. DS1 Timing Mode


1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

13. Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs


1. Sent Link ID

Received Link ID

2. Expected Link ID

3. Set Expected Equal to Received

1. No Action

2. Alarm Only

3. Alarm + Link Drop

5. Bonding Groups1. - 4. Bonding Group 1 - 4

1. Skew Threshold (ms)

2. XCV Threshold1. Disabled

2. 1e-8

3. 1e-7

4. 1e-6

5. 1e-5

6. 1e-4

7. 1e-3

3. Remote Auto-Provisioned Group

Denotes that this item only appears when COT is selected in the Application Mode.




J

K

5. Packet Flows1. Add New Flow 1

1. Source Port/Group

2. Source VID

3. Committed Rate (kbps)

4. Burst Rate (kbps)

5. Class Of Service 2

6. Dest Port/Group

7. Tag Manipulation

12. Delete Flow 4

1. Port 1

2. Port 2

3. Port 3

4. Port 4

5. Group 1

6. Group 2

7. Group 3

8. Group 4

1. 1

2. 2

3. 3

1. Port 1

2. Port 2

3. Port 3

4. Port 4

5. Group 1

6. Group 2

7. Group 3

8. Group 4

1. None

2. Push

3. Pop

4. Swap

23

This option only appears when Explicit is selected in the Classification Mode.These options only appear when Push or Swap is selected in the Tag Manipulation. Option 10 is Default Priority when selecting an existing flow.

8. New VID 3

9. Priority Inheritance 3

10. New Priority 3

11. Commit Flow

4 This option only appears when selecting an existing flow.

1 This option number increases or decreases by one as each flow is added or deleted.




L

M

7. Ethernet Client Ports1. - 4. Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4

1. Ethernet State

2. Provisioned Link Speed & Duplex

Functional Link Speed & Duplex

3. Cross-Over Mode


Link Status

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Auto

2. 10, Half

3. 10, Full

4. 100, Half

5. 100, Full

1. MDI

2. MDI-X

3. Auto

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

9. Equipment Protection1. Perform Manual Switch

8. Traffic Classes

1. - 3. Traffic Class 1 - 3 1

4. Classification Mode1. Explicit

2. P-Bit


1. - 8. P-bit Priority 0 - 7 2


2 These options only appear when P-Bit is selected in the Classification Mode.1 These options only appear when Explicit is selected in the Classification Mode.




M

10. General

1. Craft Port Baud Rate

Functional Baud Rate

2. Date

3. Time

4. Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time

5. System ID

6. Scheduled Card Reset

7. Card Reset

8. Restore Default Provisioning

1. Auto

2. Disabled

5. 38400

6. 57600

7. 115200

3. 9600

4. 19200

1. Disabled

4. 10-Min

5. 15-Min

2. 1-Min

3. 5-Min

7. 45-Min

8. 60-Min

6. 30-Min

12. Save Provisioning

13. Auto Save1. Disabled

2. Enabled

14. Security Administration

15. Change ADMIN’s Password

1. Users Currently Logged On

2. Edit User Accounts

3. Access Tech Support Account

4. Restore Default Security Settings

1. ADMIN

2. READONLY

3. READWRITE

4. TEST

1. Enable/Disable User Account

2. Access Rights

3. Change Password

4. Delete User

1. READ

2. TEST

3. READ/WRITE

4. ADMIN

11. Network ManagementN



Figure 6-22. Network Management Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

1. Management Mode

2. IP Address

3. Subnet Mask

4. Gateway

MAC Address

5. TFTP Server

6. Rear Ethernet Interface

7. Network Service Ports

8. SNMP

1. Management Mode



1. Disabled

2. Local

3. VLAN

1. - 4. Port 1 - 4

5. - 8. Group 1 - 4



2. Cross-Over Mode

Link Status



1. Auto



1. MDI

2. MDI-X

3. Auto

1. TL1 Telnet Port

2. TL1 Raw-TCP Port

3. Secondary Telnet Port

1. SNMP State1. Disabled

2. Enabled

2. SNMP Traps1. Disabled

2. Enabled

3. - 6. Trap Host 1 - 4

1. Status1. Valid

2. Under Creation

3. Invalid2. IP

3. Version1. Version 1

2. Version 24. Confirmation Timeout (sec)

5. Confirmation Retries7. System ID

8. System Location

9. System Contact

10. Read Community

11. Write Community

N

Denotes that these items only appear when Valid or Under Creation is selected in the Status.



Figure 6-23. Quick Setup Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

C

1. COT/RT

2. Copper/DS3


3. or 4. Select Ethernet Client Ports 1

5. or 6. Management Mode 1

6. or 7. IP Address 1

7. or 8. Subnet Mask 1

8. or 9. Gateway 1

9. or 10. Date 1

10. or 11. Time 1

11. or 12. System ID 1

12. or 13. - 23. or 24. DS1 Port 1 - 12 1

1. COT

2. RT

1. Copper

2. DS3

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Ethernet State



3. Cross-Over Mode


Link Status

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Auto

2. 10, Half

3. 10, Full

4. 100, Half

5. 100, Full

1. MDI

2. MDI-X

3. Auto

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. - 4. Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4

4. or 5. Packet Flows 1 (Same As Provisioning\Packet Flows)

1Denotes that this item only appears when RT is selected in the Application Mode.Option # is dependent on whether COT or RT is selected in the Application Mode.

1. Management Mode



1. Disabled

2. Local

3. VLAN

1. - 4. Port 1 - 4

5. - 8. Group 1 - 4



Figure 6-23. Status and Test Menu Trees - DS3 Mode

D

1. Controller Equipment

2. DS3


4. Ethernet Client Ports

5. DS1 Ports

6. Bonding Group Status

1. Go to Test Menu for DS1s in DS3

E

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

14. DS3

15. DS1s in DS3

1. No Test

3. Digital Line

4. CSU Loopback

5. CSU LB w/ Pattern

6. NIU Loopback


2. Analog Network

8. Pattern Test

2. Line Loopback

3. Digital Loopback

4. Remote Loopback

5. Remote ALL T1

1. No Test

1. - 28. DS1s in DS31. No Test

3. Remote Loopback

4. Remote Loopback w/ Pattern

5. CSU Loopback

6. CSU Loopback w/ Pattern

7. NIU Loopback

2. Tributary Loopback

9. Pattern Test


O

13. Bonding DS1s1. - 12. DS3 Trib 13 - 24

1. No Test

3. Payload

2. Line



Figure 6-23. Status and Test Menu Trees - DS3 Mode (Continued)

18. Test Timeout

19. Pattern

O

1. Disabled

2. 1 minute

3. 5 minutes

4. 10 minutes

5. 15 minutes

6. 30 minutes

7. 45 minutes

8. 60 minutes

1. QRSS

2. ALL ONES

3. ALL ZEROS

4. 2 IN 8 (2:6)

5. 1 IN 8 (1:7)

6. 2^15-1 INV

17. Reset ALL Tests

16. Test Alarm Relays1. Alarm Relay Test Status

1. Inactive

2. Active



Figure 6-24. Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

F

1. DS3 Statistics

2. DS1 Port Statistics

4. Bonding Group Statistics

5. Ethernet Client Statistics

6. Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data

7. Reset ALL PM Data

8. Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults

9. Enable ALL PM Thresholds

10. Disable ALL PM Thresholds

P

Q

S

T

3. DS1 Bonding StatisticsR



Figure 6-25. DS3 Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

1. Near End Daily


3. Far End Daily




1. CVCP-PFE

2. ESCP-PFE

3. SESCP-PFE

4. UASCP-PFE

P

1. CV-L

2. ES-L

3. SES-L

4. LOSS-L

5. CVP-P

6. ESP-P

7. SESP-P

8. UASP-P

9. CVCP-P

10. ESCP-P

11. SESCP-P

12. UASCP-P

1. CV-L

2. ES-L

3. SES-L

4. LOSS-L

5. CVP-P

6. ESP-P

7. SESP-P

8. UASP-P

9. CVCP-P

10. ESCP-P

11. SESCP-P

12. UASCP-P

13. Reset selected DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults

14. Enable selected DS3 PM Thresholds

15. Disable selected DS3 PM Thresholds

1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

U



Figure 6-25. DS3 Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode (Continued)



9. Reset DS3 Current Interval PM Data

10. Reset DS3 PM Data

1. CVCP-PFE

2. ESCP-PFE

3. SESCP-PFE

4. UASCP-PFE

5. Reset selected DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults

6. Enable selected DS3 PM Thresholds

7. Disable selected DS3 PM Thresholds

1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

U



Figure 6-26. DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

1. - 12. DS1 #1 - #12 [PM Data]

13. Reset ALL DS1 Port Current Interval PM Data

14. Reset ALL DS1 Port PM Data

15. Reset ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

16. Enable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

17. Disable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

1. Near End Daily






1. CV-L

2. ES-L

3. SES-L

4. LOSS-L

1. CV-L

2. ES-L

3. SES-L

4. LOSS-L




1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

Q



Figure 6-27. DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

1. - 12. Trib #13 - #24 [PM Data]

13. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data

14. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data

15. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

16. Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

17. Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

1. Near End Daily


3. Far End Daily






9. Reset Trib # Current Interval PM Data

10. Reset Trib # PM Data

1. CV-P

2. ES-P

3. SES-P

4. UAS-P

1. CV-PFE

2. ES-PFE

3. SES-PFE

4. UAS-PFE

1. CV-P

2. ES-P

3. SES-P

4. UAS-P




1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. CV-PFE

2. ES-PFE

3. SES-PFE

4. UAS-PFE




1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

R



Figure 6-28. Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode



3. Daily Thresholds


5. Reset Bonding Group # Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset Bonding Group # PM Data

1. Rx Frames

2. Rx Bytes

3. Rx Errored Events

5. Tx Bytes

1. Rx Frames

2. Rx Bytes

3. Rx Error Events

5. Tx Bytes




1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. - 4. Bonding Group 1 - 4

5. Reset ALL Bonding Group Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset ALL Bonding Group PM Data




4. Tx Frames

4. Tx Frames

S



Figure 6-29. Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

1. - 4. Ethernet Port 1 - 4

5. Reset ALL Ethernet Client Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset ALL Ethernet Client PM Data

7. Reset ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

8. Enable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

9. Disable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

T



3. Daily Thresholds


5. Reset Ethernet Port # Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset Ethernet Port # PM Data

1. Rx Packets

2. Rx Octets


8. Tx Octets

1. Rx Packets

2. Rx Octets


8. Tx Octets

9. Reset Thresholds to Defaults for selected Port

10. Enable Thresholds for selected Port

11. Disable Thresholds for selected Port

1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled




6. Rx Collisions


6. Rx Collisions

7. Tx Packets

7. Tx Packets



Figure 6-30. System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - DS3 Mode

G

1. Master Log

2. Controller A

Controller B

3. User-Definable Alarms

4. Alarm Chronology


2. Stand-by Controller Removed Level

1. - 4. Aux #1 - 4 Input

5. - 6. PWR Bus A/B Input

1. AUX # Input Description

2. AUX # Input Level1. Disabled

2. Info

3. Alert

4. Minor

5. Major

6. Critical

7. ACO

1. PWR A/B FAIL Level1. Disabled

2. Info

3. Alert

4. Minor

5. Major

6. Critical

1. Disabled

2. Info

3. Alert

4. Minor

5. Major

6. Critical

1. Ascending

2. Descending

H

Controller A

Controller B

1. Y-Modem

2. TFTP

3. Reset Active Controller

1. TFTP Server

2. Remote Filename

3. Initiate Transfer


Section 6, User Interface - Menu Descriptions

MENU DESCRIPTIONSThis section describes in detail the individual menus and screens of the MX3112 system.

MX3112 Main MenuThe MX3112 Main Menu (see Figure 6-31) is the access point to all other operations. Each Main Menu item has several functions and submenus that identify and provide access to specific operations and parameters.

Figure 6-31. MX3112 Main Menu

The MX3112 Main Menu options are shown in Table 6-2.

Table 6-2. MX3112 Main Menu Options

Option Description Function

1 Configuration This option displays the “Configuration Screen” on page 6-49.

2 Provisioning This option displays the “Provisioning Menu” on page 6-51.

3 Quick Setup This option displays the “Quick Setup Menu” on page 6-117.

4 Status This option displays the “Status Menu” on page 6-122.

5 Test This option displays the “Test Menu” on page 6-138.



MX3112

1 - Configuration

2 - Provisioning

3 - Quick Setup

4 - Status

5 - Test

6 - Performance Monitoring

7 - System Alarms

8 - Remote Management

9 - Firmware Upgrade

10 - Logout




6 Performance Monitoring This option displays the “Performance Monitoring Menu” on page 6-151.

7 System Alarms This option displays the “System Alarms Menu” on page 6-199.

8 Remote Management This option displays the “Remote Management Menu” on page 6-208.This option appears only when the Application Mode is set to COT.

8 or 9 Firmware Upgrade This option displays the “Firmware Upgrade Menu” on page 6-209.This option appears as option 8 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 9 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.

9 or 10 Logout This option displays “Logout” on page 6-213.This option appears as option 9 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 10 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.

Table 6-2. MX3112 Main Menu Options (Continued)




Configuration ScreenThe Configuration screen (see Figure 6-32) displays information about the MX3112 system. Information such as Code Version will change as upgrades are performed. The CLEI Code and Part Number can be used to search for related information on the ADTRAN web site or to order additional parts. Some information from the Configuration screen may be required when calling the ADTRAN Technical Support.

Figure 6-32. Configuration Screen

The Configuration screen fields for Controller A and Controller B are shown in Table 6-3.

Table 6-3. Configuration Screen Fields

Field Description

CLEI Code This field displays the Common Language Equipment Identifier (CLEI) code of the MX3112 controller card.

Part Number This field displays the part number of the MX3112 controller card.

Serial Number This field displays the serial number of the MX3112 controller card.

MAC Address This field displays the factory programmed Media Access Control (MAC) or physical layer address for the MX3112 controller card.

Product Revision This field displays the hardware product assembly revision of the MX3112.

Code Version This field displays the current application firmware revision level of the MX3112.

Code Checksum This field displays the checksum of the current application firmware revision level of the MX3112.



MX3112->Configuration

Controller A

CLEI Code : M3CU100BTA Product Revision :

Part Number : 1189901L1 Code Version : A01

Serial Number : 1234567890 Code Checksum : 05F52B24

MAC Address : 00:00:00:00:00:00 Boot Version : A01

Boot Checksum : 02728600

Controller B

CLEI Code : M3CU100BTA Product Revision :

Part Number : 1189901L1 Code Version : A01

Serial Number : 1234567890 Code Checksum : 05F52B24

MAC Address : 00:00:00:00:00:00 Boot Version : A01

Boot Checksum : 02728600




Boot Version This field displays the boot firmware revision code.

Boot Checksum This field displays the checksum of the boot firmware revision code.

Table 6-3. Configuration Screen Fields (Continued)

Field Description



Provisioning MenuThe Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-33 for copper mode and Figure 6-34 for DS3 mode) is used to make provisioning changes to various options.

Figure 6-33. Provisioning Menu (Copper Mode)

Figure 6-34. Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode)

The Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-4.



MX3112->Provisioning

1 - Application Mode : Copper, RT, Auto Prov Enabled

2 - DS1 Port Interfaces

3 - DS1 Bonding

4 - Bonding Groups

5 - Packet Flows

6 - Ethernet Client Ports

7 - Traffic Classes

8 - Equipment Protection

9 - General

10 - Local Network Management

11 - Save Provisioning

12 - Auto Save : Enabled

13 - Security Administration

14 - Change ADMIN's Password




MX3112->Provisioning

1 - Application Mode : DS3, RT, Auto Prov Enabled

2 - DS3 Interface

3 - DS1 Port Interfaces

4 - DS1 Bonding

5 - Bonding Groups

6 - Packet Flows

7 - Ethernet Client Ports

8 - Traffic Classes

9 - Equipment Protection

10 - General

11 - Local Network Management

12 - Save Provisioning

13 - Auto Save : Enabled

14 - Security Administration

15 - Change ADMIN's Password




Table 6-4. Provisioning Menu Options

Option Description FunctionCopper DS3

1 1 Application Mode This option displays the “Application Mode Menu” on page 6-53.

N/A 2 DS3 Interface This option displays the “DS3 Interface Menu (DS3 Mode Only)” on page 6-55.

2 3 DS1 Port Interfaces This option displays the “DS1 Port Interfaces Menu” on page 6-59.

3 4 DS1 Bonding This option displays the “DS1 Bonding” on page 6-66.

4 5 Bonding Groups This option displays the “Bonding Groups Menu” on page 6-79.

5 6 Packet Flows This option displays the “Packet Flows Menu” on page 6-83.

6 7 Ethernet Client Ports This option displays the “Ethernet Client Ports Menu” on page 6-90.

7 8 Traffic Classes This option displays the “Traffic Classes Menu” on page 6-93.

8 9 Equipment Protection This option displays the “Equipment Protection Menu” on page 6-96.

9 10 General This option displays the “General Provisioning Menu” on page 6-97.

10 11 Network Management This option displays the “Network Management Menu” on page 6-99.

11 12 Save Provisioning This option saves the current network settings.

12 13 Auto Save This option displays the “Auto Save Menu” on page 6-110.

13 14 Security Administration This option displays the “Security Administration Menu” on page 6-111.

14 15 Change Current ADMIN’s Password

This option allows the current user to change their password.



Application Mode Menu

The Application Mode menu (see Figure 6-35) is used to select the terminal mode, application mode, and auto provisioning state.

Figure 6-35. Application Mode Menu

The Application Mode menu options are shown in Table 6-5.

Table 6-5. Application Mode Menu Options


1 COT/RT This option determines whether the MX3112 controller operates as the master (COT) or as the slave (RT). Options are as follows:

• COT• RT. This option is the default setting and is

typically used when the MX3112 system is connected to the OPTI-6100 GEFM.

When this option is set to COT mode, the transmit timing for the bonded DS1s is automatically provisioned as Local. When this option is set to RT mode, the transmit timing for the bonded DS1s is automatically provisioned as Loop. These timing options can be changed independently if needed.When operating in COT mode, the unit will periodically transmit certain provisioning information toward the RT device via the bonded DS1s. This information includes the bonding group assignments for each DS1.



MX3112->Provisioning->Application Mode

1 - COT/RT : RT

2 - Copper/DS3 : Copper

3 - Auto Provisioning : Enabled




2 Copper/DS3 This parameter determines whether the network interface on the MX3112 system is configured for copper mode (twelve DS1s) or for DS3 mode (channelized DS3). Options are as follows:

• Copper• DS3

Reference the “Application Guidelines” on page 3-1 for a detailed explanation of this option.

3 Auto Provisioning This option, which is only available when the system is provisioned for RT mode, is used to select the auto provisioning state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled. This option disables auto provisioning. When disabled, the unit will not respond to the bonding group assignment messages received from the COT system. The bonding group assignments must be performed manually.

• Enabled. This option enables auto provisioning. When enabled, the unit will respond to the bonding group assignment messages received from the COT system. The automatic provisioning will override any manual bonding group assignments performed at the RT. The System ID of the RT is sent to the COT. This parameter is typically programmed into the MX3112 system when it is installed and will allow a user friendly ID to be displayed on the Remote Management menu of the COT.

This option is not displayed when the COT/RT option is set to COT.

Table 6-5. Application Mode Menu Options (Continued)




DS3 Interface Menu (DS3 Mode Only)

The DS3 Interface menu (see Figure 6-36) provides options to provision the Tx framing, Tx clock source, loopback detection, DS3 circuit identifier, and DS3 equipment identification.

Figure 6-36. DS3 Interface Menu

The DS3 Interface menu options are shown in Table 6-6.

Table 6-6. DS3 Interface Menu Options


1 Tx Framing This option is used to provision the framing. Options are as follows:

• C-bit• M23 (also called “M13”)

2 Tx Clock Source This option is used to provision the timing. Options are as follows:

• Loop. When this option is selected, timing is received from the DS3 network.

• Local. When this option is selected, timing is 44.736 Mbps ± 20 ppm (ANSI T1.102-1993).



MX3112->Provisioning->DS3 Interface

1 - Tx Framing : M23

2 - Tx Clock Source : Local

3 - Loopback Detection : Enabled

4 - DS3 Circuit Identifier : DS3 A

5 - DS3 Equipment Identification




3 Loopback Detection This option is used to disable or enable the FEAC and C-bit loopbacks. Options are as follows:

• Disabled. When this option is selected, the MX3112 system ignores all out of band loopback requests (FEAC and DS2-Level C-bit). The MX3112 system responds to individual T1 in-band CSU/NIU loopbacks if the system is configured with the T1 loopback menu.

• Enabled. When this option is selected, the MX3112 system responds to remote loopback requests received over the DS3 far end alarm and control (FEAC) channel and/or the DS2-level C-bits. This mode is valid for both C-bit and M23 framing formats.

4 DS3 Circuit Identifier This option is used to enter a DS3 circuit identifier. This field accepts up to 32 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

5 DS3 Equipment Identification This option displays the “Equipment Identification Menu (DS3 Mode Only)” on page 6-57.

Table 6-6. DS3 Interface Menu Options (Continued)




Equipment Identification Menu (DS3 Mode Only)The Equipment Identification menu (see Figure 6-37) is used to enter ID codes for the near and far end facilities, locations, frames, units, and equipment. These fields provide user-configurable text strings to identify the MX3112 system over the network.

Figure 6-37. Equipment Identification Menu

The Equipment Identification menu options are shown in Table 6-7.

Table 6-7. Equipment Identification Menu Options


1 Near End Facility ID Code This option is used to enter a near end facility ID code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is an user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 38 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

2 Near End Location ID Code This option is used to enter a near end location ID code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is an user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 11 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS3 Interface->Equipment Identification

1 - Near End Facility ID Code : N/A

2 - Near End Location ID Code : N/A

3 - Near End Frame ID Code : N/A

4 - Near End Unit Code : N/A

5 - Near End Equipment Code : N/A

Far End Facility ID Code : N/A

Far End Location ID Code : N/A

Far End Frame ID Code : N/A

Far End Unit Code : N/A

Far End Equipment Code : N/A




3 Near End Frame ID Code This option is used to enter a near end frame ID code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is an user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 10 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

4 Near End Unit Code This option is used to enter a near end unit code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is an user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 6 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

5 Near End Equipment Code This option is used to enter a near end equipment code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is a user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 10 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

Far End Facility ID Code This field displays the facility ID code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3.

Far End Location ID Code This field displays the location ID code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3.

Far End Frame ID Code This field displays the frame ID code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3.

Far End Unit Code This field displays the unit code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3.

Far End Equipment Code This field displays the equipment code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3.

Table 6-7. Equipment Identification Menu Options (Continued)




DS1 Port Interfaces Menu

The DS1 Port Interfaces menu (see Figure 6-38 for copper mode and Figure 6-39) is used to view the current settings and access the provisioning options for each DS1 port.

Figure 6-38. DS1 Port Interfaces Menu (Copper Mode)

Figure 6-39. DS1 Port Interfaces Menu (DS3 Mode)

The DS1 Port Interfaces menu options are shown in Table 6-8.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Ports

DS1 Line

Port State Length(ft) Circuit ID

1 - Enabled 0-133 DS1 Port #1












13 - Copy Provisioning to Multiple **Copper mode. All DS1s use B8ZS coding.**




MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Ports

DS1 Line Line Loopback

Port State Length(ft) Coding Detect Circuit ID

1 - Enabled 0-133 B8ZS Disabled DS1 Port #1












13 - Copy Provisioning to Multiple




Table 6-8. DS1 Port Interfaces Menu Options


1 - 12 DS1 Port # This option displays the “DS1 Port Provisioning Menu” on page 6-61.

13 Copy Provisioning to Multiple This option displays the “Copy Provisioning to Mul-tiple DS1 Ports Menu” on page 6-64.



DS1 Port Provisioning MenuThe DS1 Port Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-40 for copper mode and Figure 6-41 for DS3 mode) is used to set the state, line length, and circuit identifier for each individual DS1 port. In DS3 mode, this menu is used to also provision the line coding and loopback detection.

NOTEIn copper mode, all DS1s use B8ZS coding.

Figure 6-40. DS1 Port Provisioning Menu (Copper Mode)



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Ports->Port #1

1 - State : Enabled

2 - Line Length (feet) : 0-133

3 - Circuit Identifier : DS1 Port #1




Figure 6-41. DS1 Port Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode)

The DS1 Port Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-9.

Table 6-9. DS1 Port Provisioning Menu Fields

Option Field DescriptionCopper DS3

1 1 State This option is used to set the state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled. The DS1 transmit drivers are tri-stated, and no alarms associated with this port are reported.

• Enabled. The DS1 drivers are enabled and alarms are not suppressed.

2 2 Line Length (feet) This option is used to set the line length (line build out) for each port interface according to the dis-tance from the MX3112 system to the DTE device. Options are as follows:

• 0-133• 133-266• 266-399• 399-533• 533-655

N/A 3 Line Coding This option is used to select the line coding state. Options are as follows:

• AMI• B8ZS



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Ports->Port #1

1 - State : Enabled

2 - Line Length (feet) : 0-133

3 - Line Coding : B8ZS

4 - Loopback Detection : Disabled

5 - Circuit Identifier : DS1 Port #1




N/A 4 Loopback Detection This option is used to select the loopback detect state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• CSU• NIU

3 5 Circuit Identifier This option is used to enter a circuit identifier. The circuit ID is a user-configurable text string field used to name the individual ports. This field accepts up to 32 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

Table 6-9. DS1 Port Provisioning Menu Fields (Continued)




Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports MenuThe Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports menu (see Figure 6-42 for copper mode and Figure 6-43 for DS3 mode) is used to copy DS1 port settings to multiple DS1 ports at once.

Figure 6-42. Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu (Copper Mode)

Figure 6-43. Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu (DS3 Mode)

The Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports menu options are shown in Table 6-10.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Ports->Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports

1 - Copy FROM DS1 Port : 1

State : Enabled

Line Length (feet) : 0-133

Loopback Detection : Disabled

2 - First DS1 Port to Copy TO : 2

3 - Last DS1 Port to Copy TO : 12

4 - Copy Provisioning




MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Ports->Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports

1 - Copy FROM DS1 Port : 1

State : Enabled

Line Length (feet) : 0-133

Line Coding : B8ZS

Loopback Detection : Disabled

2 - First DS1 Port to Copy TO : 2

3 - Last DS1 Port to Copy TO : 12

4 - Copy Provisioning




Table 6-10. Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu Options


1 Copy FROM DS1 Port This option is used to enter the DS1 Port # from which the settings will be copied.

State This field displays the state setting that is to be copied.

Line Length (feet) This field displays the line length setting that is to be copied.

Line Coding (DS3 Mode Only) This field displays the line coding setting that is to be copied.

Loopback Detection This field displays the loopback detection setting that is to be copied.

2 First DS1 Port to Copy TO This option is used to enter the first DS1 Port # to which the settings will be copied to.

3 Last DS1 Port to Copy TO This option is used to enter the last DS1 Port # to which the settings will be copied to.

4 Copy Provisioning This option copies the settings to the selected DS1 ports.



DS1 Bonding

The DS1 Bonding menu (see Figure 6-44 for copper mode and Figure 6-45 for DS3 mode) is used to view the current settings and access the bonding group, loopback, and state options for each DS1 port in copper mode and each DS3 tributary in DS3 mode.

Figure 6-44. DS1 Bonding Menu (Copper Mode)

Figure 6-45. DS1 Bonding Menu (DS3 Mode)

The DS1 Bonding menu options are shown in Table 6-11.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding

DS1 Port Bonding Group Lpbk Detect State

1 - 1 Disabled Disabled IS These DS1s always use

2 - 2 Disabled Disabled IS ESF framing.

3 - 3 Disabled Disabled IS

4 - 4 Disabled Disabled IS Auto Provisioning Enabled.

5 - 5 Disabled Disabled IS Bonding Group Assignment

6 - 6 Disabled Disabled IS controlled by COT.







13 - DS1 Timing : Loop

14 - Link Identifiers




MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding

DS3 Trib Bonding Group Lpbk Detect State

1 - 13 Disabled Disabled IS These DS1s always use

2 - 14 Disabled Disabled IS ESF framing.


4 - 16 Disabled Disabled IS Auto Provisioning Enabled.

5 - 17 Disabled Disabled IS Bonding Group Assignment

6 - 18 Disabled Disabled IS controlled by COT.







13 - DS1 Timing : Loop

14 - Link Identifiers

Selection : '?' - System Help Scree



Table 6-11. DS1 Bonding Menu Options


1-12 N/A DS1 Port 1 - 12 This option displays the “DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu (Copper Mode Only)” on page 6-68.

N/A 1-12 DS3 Tributary 13 - 24 This option displays the “DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode Only)” on page 6-70.

13 13 DS1 Timing This option displays the “DS1 Timing Mode Menu” on page 6-75.

14 14 Link Identifiers This option displays the “Link Identifiers Menu” on page 6-76.



DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu (Copper Mode Only)The DS1 Port #1 - #12 menu (see Figure 6-50) is used to provision the DS1 bonding group, loopback detection, and state for each individual DS1 port.

Figure 6-46. DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu

The DS1 Port #1 - #12 menu options are shown in Table 6-12.

Table 6-12. DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu Options


1 Bonding Group This option is used to enter the bonding group assignment for each DS1 port.

• Enter 1 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 1.• Enter 2 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 2.• Enter 3 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 3.• Enter 4 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 4.• Enter 0 to remove a DS1 from its assigned

bonding group.The bonding group is automatically configured by the COT when auto provisioning is enabled.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->DS1 Port #1

1 - Bonding Group : Disabled

2 - Loopback Detect : Disabled

3 - State : IS




2 Loopback Detect This option is used to select the loopback detect state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• CSU• NIU• FDL• CSU + FDL• NIU + FDL

3. State This option is used select the service state of the bonded DS1. When the bonded DS1 is set to out of service (OOS), it is possible to suppress the alarms on that channel. A DS1 would typically be set to out of service during testing. Options are as follows:

• IS• OOS

Table 6-12. DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu Options (Continued)




DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode Only)The DS3 Tributary Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-47) is used to provision the bonding group, loopback detection, and state for each individual DS3 tributary.

Figure 6-47. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu

The DS3 Tributary Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-13.

Table 6-13. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu Options


1 Bonding Group This option is used to enter the bonding group assignment for each DS3 tributary.

• Enter 1 to assign a DS3 tributary to Bonding Group 1.




• Enter 0 to remove a DS3 tributary from the bonding group it is assigned to.

The bonding group is automatically configured by the COT when auto provisioning is enabled.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->DS3 Trib #13

1 - Bonding Group : Disabled

2 - Loopback Detect : Disabled

3 - State : IS




2 Loopback Detect This option is used to select the loopback detect state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• CSU• NIU• FDL• CSU + FDL• NIU + FDL

3 State This option is used select the service state of the DS3 tributary. When the tributary is set to out of service (OOS), it is possible to suppress the alarms on that channel. A tributary would typically be set to out of service during testing. Options are as fol-lows:

• IS• OOS

Table 6-13. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu Options (Continued)




DS1 Timing MenuThe DS1 Timing menu is used to provision the timing for the DS1s. When local or loop is selected as the DS1 timing mode, the DS1 Timing menu is displayed as shown in Figure 6-48. When line is selected as the DS1 timing mode, the DS1 Timing menu is displayed as shown in Figure 6-49.

Figure 6-48. DS1 Timing Menu (DS1 Timing Mode = Local or Loop)

The DS1 Timing menu options are shown in Table 6-14.

Table 6-14. DS1 Timing Menu Options


1 DS1 Timing Mode This option displays the “DS1 Timing Mode Menu” on page 6-75.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->DS1 Timing

1 - DS1 Timing Mode : Loop




Figure 6-49. DS1 Timing Menu (DS1 Timing Mode = Line)

The DS1 Timing menu options are shown in Table 6-15.

Table 6-15. DS1 Timing Menu Options


1 DS1 Timing Mode This option displays the “DS1 Timing Mode Menu” on page 6-75.

Functional Reference This field displays the status of the functional reference.

Primary Reference Status This field displays the functional status of the primary reference.

Secondary Reference Status This field displays the functional status of the secondary reference.

2 Primary Reference This option is used to select the primary reference. The options are one of the bonding DS1s. If the primary reference fails, the secondary reference will become the active timing reference.

3 Secondary Reference This option is used to select the secondary reference. The options are one of the bonding DS1s.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->DS1 Timing

1 - DS1 Timing Mode : Line

Functional Reference : Fail

Primary Reference Status : Fail

Secondary Reference Status : Fail

2 - Primary Reference : DS1 Port #1

3 - Secondary Reference : DS1 Port #1

4 - Line Timing Failure Mode : Loop

5 - Reference Restoration : Nonrevertive

6 - Switch Pri/Sec References




4 Line Timing Failure Mode This option is used to set the timing mode if both the primary and secondary reference fail. Options are as follows:

• Loop• Local

5 Reference Restoration This option is used to provision the active timing reference. Options are as follows:

• Revertive. If provisioned as revertive, then the active timing reference will revert to the primary reference if its status is okay.

• Nonrevertive. If provisioned as non-revertive, then the system will not automatically revert to the primary reference.

6 Switch Pri/Sec References This option is used to swap the provisioned primary and secondary references.

Table 6-15. DS1 Timing Menu Options (Continued)




DS1 Timing Mode MenuThe DS1 Timing Mode menu (see Figure 6-50) is used to control the transmit timing mode for the bonded DS1s.

Figure 6-50. DS1 Timing Mode Menu

The DS1 Timing Mode menu options are shown in Table 6-16.

Table 6-16. DS1 Timing Mode Menu Options


1 Loop The transmit timing for each bonded DS1 is derived from its respective received clock.

2 Line The transmit timing for all bonded DS1s is derived from a common onboard timing source.

3 Local The transmit timing for all bonded DS1s is derived from the received clock of a user-designated DS1.



DS1 Timing Mode : Loop

1 - Loop

2 - Line

3 - Local




Link Identifiers MenuThe Link Identifiers menu is shown in Figure 6-51 for copper mode and Figure 6-52 for DS3 mode. A link ID is analogous to a path trace string for bonded DS1s. The value is an ASCII text string that can be provisioned to be unique among other link ID values. Each direction of a bonded DS1 can be provisioned with a unique identification string for the purposes of verifying that the DS1s are properly connected. Actions can be taken if the received link ID is not equal to the expected link ID value for a given DS1.

Figure 6-51. Link Identifiers Menu (Copper Mode)

Figure 6-52. Link Identifiers Menu (DS3 Mode)



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->Link Identifiers

DS1 Port Sent Link ID Received Link ID Expected Link ID

1 - 1

2 - 2

3 - 3

4 - 4

5 - 5

6 - 6

7 - 7

8 - 8

9 - 9

10 - 10

11 - 11

12 - 12

13 - Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs

14 - Mismatch Action : No Action




MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->Link Identifiers

DS3 Trib Sent Link ID Received Link ID Expected Link ID

1 - 13

2 - 14

3 - 15

4 - 16

5 - 17

6 - 18

7 - 19

8 - 20

9 - 21

10 - 22

11 - 23

12 - 24

13 - Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs

14 - Mismatch Action : No Action




The Link Identifiers menu options are shown in Table 6-17.

Table 6-17. Link Identifiers Menu Options


1-12 N/A DS1 Port 1 - 12 This option displays the “Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu” on page 6-78.

N/A 1-12 DS1 Trib 1 - 12 This option displays the “Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu” on page 6-78.

13 13 Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs

This option is used to set all expected link IDs to the received link IDs.

14 14 Mismatch Action This option is used to select the action to be taken in the event that the received link ID does not equal the expected value. Options are as follows:

• No Action. No action is taken.• Alarm Only. Issues an alarm for the DS1 that

indicates a link mismatch condition.• Alarm + Link Drop. Issues an alarm for the

DS1 that indicates a link mismatch condition. Removes the DS1 from the provisioned bonding group and reinstates the DS1 if the mismatch condition is cleared.



Link Identifiers DS1 Port MenuThe Link Identifiers DS1 Port menu is shown in Figure 6-53.

Figure 6-53. Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu

The Link Identifiers DS1 Port menu options are shown in Table 6-18.

Table 6-18. Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu Options


1 Sent Link ID This option is used to enter a sent link identifier. The sent link ID is a user-configurable text string field. This field accepts up to 20 alphanumeric char-acters, including spaces and special characters.

Received Link ID This field displays the received link ID.

2 Expected Link ID This option is used to enter a expected link identi-fier. The expected link ID is a user-configurable text string field. This field accepts up to 20 alphanu-meric characters, including spaces and special characters.

3 Set Expected Equal to Received This option is used to set the expected link ID to the same text string as the received link ID.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->Link Identifiers->DS1 Port #1

1 - Sent Link ID :

Received Link ID :

2 - Expected Link ID :

3 - Set Expected Equal to Received




Bonding Groups Menu

The Bonding Groups menu (see Figure 6-54 for RT mode and Figure 6-55 for COT mode) is used to view the current settings and access the provisioning options for each bonding group.

Figure 6-54. Bonding Groups Menu (RT Mode)

Figure 6-55. Bonding Groups Menu (COT Mode)

The Bonding Groups menu options are shown in Table 6-19.



MX3112->Provisioning->Bonding Groups

Bonding Group Skew Threshold (ms) XCV Threshold

1 - 4 1e-5

2 - 4 1e-5

3 - 4 1e-5

4 - 4 1e-5




MX3112->Provisioning->Bonding Groups

Remote Auto-Provisioned

Bonding Group Skew Threshold (ms) XCV Threshold Bonding Group

1 - 4 Disabled 1

2 - 4 Disabled 2

3 - 4 Disabled 3

4 - 4 Disabled 4




Table 6-19. Bonding Groups Menu Options


1 - 4 Bonding Group 1 - 4 This option displays the “Bonding Group Provision-ing Menu” on page 6-81.



Bonding Group Provisioning MenuThe Bonding Group Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-56) is used to provision the skew threshold and XCV threshold for each bonding group.

Figure 6-56. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu

The Bonding Group Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-20.

Table 6-20. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu Options


1 Skew Threshold This option is used to enter the maximum allowable skew threshold, in milliseconds, for each bonding group. Enter 0 to disable this option. Skew thresholds from 1 millisecond to 16 milliseconds (in 1 millisecond intervals) are available. The default skew threshold is 4 milliseconds.A DS1 will automatically be removed from a bonding group if the relative skew exceeds the specified threshold. The DS1 will automatically be added back to the group once the relative skew is below the threshold (plus 0.50 millisecond of hysteresis).



MX3112->Provisioning->Bonding Groups->Bonding Group #1

1 - Skew Threshold (ms) : 4

2 - XCV Threshold : Disabled

3 - Remote Auto-Provisioned Group : 1




2 XCV Threshold This option is used to select the XCV threshold. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• 1e-8• 1e-7• 1e-6• 1e-5• 1e-4• 1e-3

A DS1 will automatically be removed from a bonding group if its XCV exceeds the specified threshold. The DS1 will automatically be added back to the group once the XCV is below the threshold.

3 Remote Auto-Provisioned Group This option sets the bonding group number of the RT system. For example, bonded DS1s 4-6 of the COT could be designated for both bonding group #2 of the COT and bonding group #3 of the RT.This option only appears when COT is selected in the Application Mode.

Table 6-20. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu Options (Continued)




Packet Flows Menu

The Packet Flows menu is shown in Figure 6-57. Refer to “Data Path Provisioning” on page 5-5 for a more complete explanation of flows.

Figure 6-57. Packet Flows Menu

The Packet Flows menu option is shown in Table 6-21.

The Packet Flows hot keys are shown in Table 6-22.

Table 6-21. Packet Flows Menu Option


1 - 8 Packet Flow # This option displays the “Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu” on page 6-85.Note: Up to 100 flows can be provisioned.

9 Add New Flow This option displays the “Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu” on page 6-85.Note: The option number increases or decreases by one as each flow is added or deleted.

Table 6-22. Packet Flows Hot Keys


N Next This hot key is used to display the next screen.

P Previous This hot key is used to display the previous screen.




Page 1 of 1

Src Dest



1 - P1 - 0 No Limit 3 G1 Push 101 Inh(7)




5 - G1 101 0 No Limit 3 P1 Pop - -

6 - G2 102 0 No Limit 3 P2 Pop - -

7 - G3 103 0 No Limit 3 P3 Pop - -

8 - G4 104 0 No Limit 3 P4 Pop - -

----------------------------->> END OF FLOW LIST <<----------------------------


Selection:




F First This hot key is used to display the first page of flows.

L Last This hot key is used to display the last page of flows.

S Sort This hot key displays the “Sort By Menu” on page 6-88.

Q Quick-Set This hot key displays the “Quick-Set Menu” on page 6-89.

Table 6-22. Packet Flows Hot Keys (Continued)




Packet Flows Add/Edit MenuThe Packet Flows Add/Edit menu is shown in Figure 6-58.

NOTEAfter making changes to the flow in the Packet Flows Add/Edit menu, the Commit Flow option must be selected for the changes to be applied.

Figure 6-58. Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu

The Packet Flows Add/Edit menu option is shown in Table 6-23.

Table 6-23. Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu Option


1 Source Port/Group This option is used to select the source port or group. Options are as follows

• Port 1• Port 2• Port 3• Port 4• Group 1• Group 2• Group 3• Group 4



MX3112->Provisioning->Packet Flows->Edit

1 - Source Port/Group : Port 1

2 - Source VID : Not Specified

3 - Committed Rate (kbps) : 0

4 - Burst Rate (kbps) : No Limit

5 - Class Of Service : 3

6 - Dest Port/Group : Group 1

7 - Tag Manipulation : Push

8 - New VID : 101

9 - Priority Inheritance : Enabled

10 - Default Priority : 7

11 - Commit Flow

12 - Delete Flow

Selection: '?' - System Help Screen



2 Source VID This option is used to enter the source VLAN ID.

3 Committed Rate (kbps) This option is used to enter the bit rate that the MX3112 system will always attempt to reserve for this flow in the destination bonding group.

4 Burst Rate (kbps) This option is used to enter the maximum allowed average bit rate for this flow.

5 Class of Service This option is used to select the CoS class that all packets that match the flow will be explicitly classi-fied to. Options are as follows:

• 1• 2• 3

6 Dest Port/Group This option is used to select the destination port or group that all packets in the flow will exit on. Options are as follows


7 Tag Manipulation This option is used to select the tag manipulation that will be performed on the packets in the flow. Options are as follows:

• None• Push• Pop• Swap

8 New VID This option is used to enter the new VLAN ID. This option appears only when push or swap is selected on the Tag Manipulation menu.

9 Priority Inheritance This option is used to instruct the system on whether or not to inherit the priority value from the existing VLAN tag. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• Enabled

This option appears only when push or swap is selected on the Tag Manipulation menu.

Table 6-23. Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu Option (Continued)




10 Default Priority This option is used to enter a new priority. This option appears only when push or swap is selected on the Tag Manipulation menu.

11 Commit Flow This option is used to accept the changes made to the flow and to put the changes into effect.

12 Delete Flow This option is used to delete the selected flow. This option appears only when editing a flow.

Table 6-23. Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu Option (Continued)




Sort By MenuThe Sort By menu (see Figure 6-59) is used to sort the list of flows on the Packet Flows menu.

Figure 6-59. Sort By Menu

The Sort By menu option is shown in Table 6-24.

Table 6-24. Sort By Menu Option


1 Source Port/Group and Source VID This option is used to sort the list of flows on the Packet Flows menu by the source port/group and source VID.

2 Destination Port/Group This option is used to sort the list of flows on the Packet Flows menu by the destination port/group.



MX3112->Provisioning->Packet Flows->Sort By

Current Method = Source Port/Group and Source VID

1 - Source Port/Group and Source VID

2 - Destination Port/Group




Quick-Set MenuThe Quick-Set menu (see Figure 6-60) is used to establish a generic set of flows or delete all flows.

CAUTIONThis operation will replace any existing flows and will disrupt the flow of data.

Figure 6-60. Quick-Set Menu

The Quick-Set menu option is shown in Table 6-25.

Table 6-25. Quick-Set Menu Option


1 One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Default VIDs

This option is used to automatically establish a potentially common set of flows as shown in Figure 6-57 on page 6-83.

2 Delete All Flows This option is used to delete all flows.



MX3112->Provisioning->Packet Flows->Quick-Set

1 - One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Default VIDs

2 - Delete All Flows

Warning!!! This operation will replace any existing

flows and will disrupt the flow of data.




Ethernet Client Ports Menu

The Ethernet Client Ports menu (see Figure 6-61) is used to view the current settings and access the provisioning options for each Ethernet client port.

Figure 6-61. Ethernet Client Ports Menu

The Ethernet Client Ports menu options are shown in Table 6-26.

Table 6-26. Ethernet Client Port Menu Options


1 - 4 Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4 This option displays the “Ethernet Client Ports Pro-visioning Menu” on page 6-91.



MX3112->Provisioning->Ethernet Client Ports

Cross- Link State

Rate over Link Follows

Port State & Duplex Mode Status Group State

1 - Enabled Auto(Unknown) Auto Down Disabled







Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning MenuThe Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-62) is used to provision the Ethernet state, the provisioned rate and duplex, the cross-over mode, and the link state follows group state for each Ethernet client port.

Figure 6-62. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu

The Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-27.

Table 6-27. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu Options


1 Ethernet State This option is used to select the Ethernet state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled. This option disables the client Ethernet port. Link status alarms will be suppressed and the Ethernet link for the port is forced down.

• Enabled. This option enables the client Ethernet port.

2 Provisioned Rate & Duplex This option is used to select the rate and duplex. Options are as follows:

• Auto. This option allows auto negotiation of the Ethernet rate and duplex.

• 10, Half• 10, Full• 100, Half• 100, Full



MX3112->Provisioning->Ethernet Client Ports->Port #1

1 - Ethernet State : Enabled

2 - Provisioned Rate & Duplex : Auto

Functional Rate & Duplex : Unknown

3 - Cross-Over Mode : Auto

4 - Link State Follows Group State : Disabled

Link Status : Down




Functional Rate & Duplex This field displays the actual data rate of the Ethernet client port.

3 Cross-Over Mode This option is used to select the cross-over mode for the selected Ethernet client port. Options are as fol-lows:

• MDI• MDI-X• Auto

4 Link State Follows Group State This option is used select the mode that governs the Ethernet state. Options are as follows

• Disabled. The state of the Ethernet port is governed by the Ethernet state option.

• Enabled. The state of the Ethernet port is governed by the Ethernet state option in combination with the status of any associated bonding groups according to the provisioned flows. If the Ethernet state option is enabled, but the bonding groups associated with this port are down (or if there are no associated bonding groups), then the port will behave as though it is disabled (Ethernet link is forced down).

Link Status This read-only field displays the Ethernet client port status as being either Up or Down. The front panel Ethernet link LED also displays this status.

Table 6-27. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu Options (Continued)




Traffic Classes Menu

The Traffic Classes menu (see Figure 6-63 and Figure 6-64) is used to set the queue depth for each traffic class or each P-Bit priority and to set the classification mode.

Prioritization of traffic is especially important in cases such as when the rate of received traffic that is destined for a bonding group is greater than the available bandwidth of that bonding group. It is often preferable for the system to make deterministic, intelligent decisions about which packets will be dropped and which will be forwarded.

Consider a scenario where all of the traffic received from Ethernet ports 1 and 2 is to be forwarded to bonding group 1. An important question to consider is which packets are more likely to be discarded if the available bandwidth of bonding group 1 is not enough to carry the combined traffic received on both Ethernet ports. Should one flow always have priority over the other flow, or should prioritization perhaps be done on a per-packet basis according to the P-bits of any pre-existing VLAN tags?

For some customer applications, it is preferable for a packet to be discarded during congestion periods rather than for the packet to persist but with excessive latency. For other applications, higher latency is preferable to packets being discarded. The MX3112 supports provisionable egress queue depths that allow the system to be further tuned to handle one preference or the other.

The bonding engine within the MX3112 can be viewed to have multiple egress queues for each bonding group (one queue for each class of service), where the higher priority queues are emptied before the lower priority queues.

When the Classification Mode is Explicit, there are effectively three egress queues: one queue for each of the three explicit class of service (1, 2, or 3) as shown in Figure 6-63 on page 6-94.

When the Classification Mode is P-bit, there are effectively eight egress queues: on queue for each of the eight classes of service that can be derived from the VLAN tag P-bit field. Figure 6-64 on page 6-95 shows the Traffic Class menu when the Classification Mode is set to P-bit.

The provisionable queue depth values offer a trade-off between the system’s potential latency of bursted packets and the ability to process bursted packets without them being discarded. Higher queue depths allow the system to process larger bursts, but can result in a higher latency of packets due to the greater time required to empty a full egress queue. Smaller queue depths can result in lower latency of bursted packets, but with a higher probability of discarding burst packets.

CAUTIONChanging the classification mode is traffic-affecting.



Figure 6-63. Traffic Classes Menu with Classification Mode set to Explicit

For explicit classification mode, the Traffic Classes menu options are shown in Table 6-28.

Table 6-28. Traffic Classes Menu Options


1 - 3 Traffic Class 1 - 3 This option is used to enter the queue depth.

4 Classification Mode This option is used to set the classification mode. Options are as follows:

• Explicit. When the Classification Mode is provisioned as Explicit, each flow can be explicitly provisioned to have a certain relative priority. A Class of Service (CoS) field becomes visible for each flow. The CoS value sets the priority of the flow relative to the priority of other flows that are forwarded to the same port or group. The CoS value for a given flow can be explicitly set as 1, 2, or 3, where 1 is the highest priority.

• P-bit. When the Classification Mode is provisioned as P-bit, the Class of Service value for each flow does not apply and is not visible. The priority of each packet is inherited from the P-bit field of the top pre-existing VLAN tag, if it exists, as it is received. This P-bit field within the VLAN tag is three bits wide, allowing for up to eight classes of service (0 = highest priority, 7 = lowest priority).



MX3112->Provisioning->Traffic Classes

Traffic Class Queue Depth (packets)

1 - 1 50

2 - 2 50

3 - 3 50

4 - Classification Mode : Explicit




Figure 6-64. Traffic Classes Menu with Classification Mode set to P-Bit

For P-Bit classification mode, the Traffic Classes menu options are shown in Table 6-29.

Table 6-29. Traffic Classes Menu Options


1 - 8 P-Bit Priority 0-7 This option is used to enter the queue depth.

9 Classification Mode This option is used to set the classification mode. Options are as follows:

• Explicit. When the Classification Mode is provisioned as Explicit, each flow can be explicitly provisioned to have a certain relative priority. A Class of Service (CoS) field becomes visible for each flow. The CoS value sets the priority of the flow relative to the priority of other flows that are forwarded to the same port or group. The CoS value for a given flow can be explicitly set as 1, 2, or 3, where 1 is the highest priority.

• P-bit. When the Classification Mode is provisioned as P-bit, the Class of Service value for each flow does not apply and is not visible. The priority of each packet is inherited from the P-bit field of the top pre-existing VLAN tag, if it exists, as it is received. This P-bit field within the VLAN tag is three bits wide, allowing for up to eight classes of service (0 = highest priority, 7 = lowest priority).



MX3112->Provisioning->Traffic Classes

P-bit Priority Queue Depth (packets)

1 - 0 100

2 - 1 100

3 - 2 100

4 - 3 100

5 - 4 100

6 - 5 100

7 - 6 100

8 - 7 100

9 - Classification Mode : P-Bit




Equipment Protection Menu

The Equipment Protection menu (see Figure 6-65) is used to perform a manual switch from the active card to the standby card.

CAUTIONPerforming a manual switch will briefly interrupt customer data.

Figure 6-65. Equipment Protection Menu

The Equipment Protection menu options are shown in Table 6-30.

Table 6-30. Equipment Protection Menu Options


1 Perform Manual Switch This option is used to perform a manual switch from the active controller card to the standby controller card.



MX3112->Provisioning->Equipment Protection

Active (Card A) : Normal

Standby (Card B) : Not Installed

1 - Perform Manual Switch




General Provisioning Menu

The General Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-66) is used to provision the craft port baud rate, the date, time, auto-logoff inactivity time, to reset the MX3112 system, and to restore default provisioning.

CAUTIONIf the baud rate is changed, the rate changes immediately, and the terminal emulation software must be updated to reflect the change.

CAUTIONResetting this card will disrupt traffic and cause a switch to the standby card if it is installed.

Figure 6-66. General Provisioning Menu

The General Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-31.



MX3112->Provisioning->General

1 - Craft Port Baud Rate : Auto

Functional Baud Rate : 115200

2 - Date : 01/01/2005

3 - Time : 12:00:00

4 - Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time : 15-Min


6 - Scheduled Card Reset : Disabled

7 - Card Reset

8 - Restore Default Provisioning




Table 6-31. General Provisioning Menu Options


1 Craft Port Baud Rate This option is used to select the craft port baud rate. Options are as follows:

• Auto. This option allows the craft port baud rate to be set automatically.

• Disabled. This option disables the local craft port interface. This allows a Telnet session to disable the craft port.

• 9600• 19200• 38400• 57600• 115200

Functional Baud Rate This field displays the actual craft port baud rate.

2 Date This option is used to enter the date.

3 Time This option is used to enter the time.

4 Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time This option is used to select the amount of inactivity time before the system will automatically log off. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• 1-Min• 5-Min• 10-Min• 15-Min• 30-Min• 45-Min• 60-Min

5 System ID This option is used to enter a 20-character system identification for the unit. The System ID is a user-friendly identification for the MX3112 system that is automatically displayed on the provisioning screen of the COT/GEFM.

6 Scheduled Card Reset This option is used to enter the scheduled card reset date and time. This option is disabled if the scheduled date and time is passed.

7 Card Reset This option is used to perform a manual card reset.

8 Restore Default Provisioning This option is used to restore all provisioning options to the default settings.



Network Management Menu

The Network Management menu (see Figure 6-67) is used to provision Ethernet information.

CAUTIONChanging IP settings will terminate all active Telnet sessions.

Figure 6-67. Network Management Menu

The Network Management menu options are shown in Table 6-32.

Table 6-32. Network Management Menu Options


1 Management Mode This option displays the “Management Mode Menu” on page 6-101.

2 IP Address This option is used to enter the IP Address. The IP Address is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value between 000 and 255.



MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management

1 - Management Mode : VLAN 501, Group 1

2 - IP Address : 10.100.51.95

3 - Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0

4 - Gateway : 10.100.51.254

MAC Address : 02:01:44:09:00:28

5 - TFTP Server : 0.0.0.0

6 - Rear Ethernet Interface

7 - Network Service Ports

8 - SNMP




3 Subnet Mask This option is used to enter the subnet mask. A subnet mask is used to reduce the traffic on each subnetwork by confining traffic to only the subnet-work for which it was intended. A subnet mask makes the entire network more manageable. In effect, each subnet functions as though it were an independent network, keeping local traffic local and forwarding traffic to another subnet only if the address of the data is external to the subnet. The Subnet Mask is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value between 000 and 255.

4 Gateway This option is used to enter the default gateway/router between the internal network and the exter-nal network. The gateway address is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value between 000 and 255.

5 TFTP Server This option is used to enter the address for the remote TFTP server that is used to download code. Contact the network administrator for this address.

6 Rear Ethernet Interface This option displays the “Rear Ethernet Interface Menu” on page 6-103.

7 Network Service Ports This option displays the “Network Service Ports Menu” on page 6-105.

8 SNMP This option displays the “SNMP Menu” on page 6-106.

Table 6-32. Network Management Menu Options (Continued)




Management Mode MenuThe Management Mode menu (see Figure 6-68) is used to provision the management mode, VLAN ID, and port/group. For additional details on management modes, refer to “Network Management” on page 6-3.

NOTEThe management VID may not equal the source VID or the new VID of any flows.

Figure 6-68. Management Mode Menu

The Management Mode menu options are shown in Table 6-33.

Table 6-33. Management Mode Menu Options


1 Management Mode This option is used to provision the interface from which the system can be managed via Ethernet. Table 6-34 describes the management modes.

2 Management VLAN ID When the management mode is set to VLAN, this option is used to provision the VLAN ID designated for managing the system. The possible values are 1 through 4094.



MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->Management Mode

1 - Management Mode : VLAN

Options for VLAN Management

2 - Management VLAN ID : 501

3 - Management Port/Group : Group 1





3 Management Port/Group When the management mode is set to VLAN, this option is used select the client Ethernet port or bonding group designated for carrying Ethernet management traffic for the system. Options are as follows:


Table 6-34. Management Modes

Option Mode Function

1 Disabled The system cannot be managed via Ethernet. Man-agement connectivity is supported only via craft interface and the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only). The chassis Ethernet port is dis-abled.

2 Local Management connectivity is supported via the craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or via Ethernet from the chassis 10/100 Ethernet port.

3 VLAN Management connectivity is supported via the craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or via Ethernet from a VLAN on a designated bonding group or a customer 10/100 port. The chassis Ethernet port is disabled.

Table 6-33. Management Mode Menu Options (Continued)




Rear Ethernet Interface MenuThe Rear Ethernet Interface menu (see Figure 6-69) is used to provision provisioned data rate and cross-over mode for the rear Ethernet interface.

Figure 6-69. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu

The Rear Ethernet Interface menu options are shown in Table 6-35.

Table 6-35. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu Options


1 Provisioned Rate & Duplex This option is used to select the data rate and duplex. Options are as follows:

• Auto. This option allows auto negotiation of the Ethernet line speed and duplex.

• 10 Mbps Half Duplex• 10 Mbps Full Duplex• 100 Mbps Half Duplex• 100 Mbps Full Duplex

Functional Rate & Duplex This field displays the actual data rate of the Ethernet port.



MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->Rear Ethernet Interface

1 - Provisioned Rate & Duplex : Auto

Functional Rate & Duplex : Unknown

2 - Cross-Over Mode : Auto

Link Status : Down




2 Cross-Over Mode This option is used to select the cross-over mode for the selected Ethernet client port. Options are as follows:

• MDI• MDI-X• Auto

Link Status This read-only field displays the status of the network as being either Up or Down.

Table 6-35. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu Options (Continued)




Network Service Ports MenuThe Network Service Ports menu (see Figure 6-70) provides the option to enter a secondary port number.

Figure 6-70. Network Service Ports Menu

The Network Service Ports menu option is shown in Table 6-36.

Table 6-36. Network Service Ports Menu Option


1 TL1 Telnet Port This option is used to enter the TCP port number associated with managing the system via TL1, with normal telnet negotiation operations enabled. The possible values are 1024 through 65535.

2 TL1 Raw-TCP Port This option is used to enter the TCP port number associated with managing the system via TL1, with normal telnet negotiation operations disabled. The possible values are 1024 through 65535.

3 Secondary Telnet Port This option is used to enter an additional port to which a Telnet menu connection can be established. This port is currently no different than the primary port 23.



MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->Network Service Ports

1 - TL1 Telnet Port : 2000

2 - TL1 Raw-TCP Port : 2001

3 - Secondary Telnet Port : 2002




SNMP MenuThe SNMP menu (see Figure 6-71) is used to provision the SNMP state and the SNMP traps. This menu is also used to enter information for the system ID, system location, system contact, read community, and write community.

Figure 6-71. SNMP Menu

The SNMP menu option is shown in Table 6-37.

Table 6-37. SNMP Menu Option


1 SNMP State This option is used to enable or disable the SNMP state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled. When disabled, the MX3112 ignores all incoming SNMP packets and does not transmit SNMP packets.

• Enabled

2 SNMP Traps This option is used to enable or disable the SNMP traps. Options are as follows:


3 - 6 Trap Host 1 - 4 This option displays the “Trap Host Menu” on page 6-108.



MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->SNMP

1 - SNMP State : Disabled

2 - SNMP Traps : Disabled

3 - Trap Host 1 : 172.22.118.242

4 - Trap Host 2

5 - Trap Host 3

6 - Trap Host 4


8 - System Location : SysLocation Not Set

9 - System Contact : www.adtran.com

10 - Read Community : public

11 - Write Community : private




7 System ID This option provides a user-configurable text string for the name of the MX3112. This name helps dis-tinguish the MX3112 among different installations. Up to 20 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

8 System Location This option provides a user-configurable text string for the location of the MX3112. This field is used to identify the physical location of the unit. Up to 55 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

9 System Contact This option provides a user-configurable text string for a SNMP contact name. This field can be used to enter the name, phone number, or e-mail address of a person responsible for the SNMP. Up to 55 alpha-numeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

10 Read Community This option is used to enter the authentication strings used for SNMP management. Input a value that matches the MX3112 to the SNMP manager for read privileges. The SNMP read community name defaults to “public”. Up to 32 alphanumeric charac-ters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

11 Write Community This option is used to enter the authentication strings used for SNMP management. Input a value that matches the MX3112 to the SNMP manager for write privileges. The SNMP write community name defaults to “private”. Up to 32 alphanumeric charac-ters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

Table 6-37. SNMP Menu Option (Continued)




Trap Host MenuThe Trap Host menu (see Figure 6-72) is used to provision the status, the IP, the version, and the confirmation timeout and retries.

Figure 6-72. Trap Host Menu

The Trap Host menu option is shown in Table 6-38.

Table 6-38. Trap Host Menu Option


1 Status This option is used to set the SNMP trap host status. Table 6-39 describes the SNMP trap host states.

2 IP This option is used to enter the IP address of the SNMP manager to which the MX3112 sends traps.

3 Version This option is used to select the SNMP version to be used for reporting traps to the SNMP manager. Options are as follows:

• Version 1• Version 2



MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->SNMP->Trap Host 1

1 - Status : Valid

2 - IP : 172.22.118.242

3 - Version : Version 2

4 - Confirmation Timeout (sec) : 3

5 - Confirmation Retries : 0




4 Confirmation Time (sec) This option is used to set the initial timeout, in sec-onds, for each trap sent to the SNMP manager if confirmations are enabled. On each subsequent retry, the timeout will be doubled. The default value is three seconds.

5 Confirmation Retries This option is used to set the maximum number of times that the MX3112 system will send a trap to the host. If set to zero, the MX3112 system will dis-able trap confirmation. If set to a value greater than zero, the MX3112 system will enable trap confirma-tion. The default value is zero.

Table 6-39. Trap Host Status

Option States Function

1 Valid This status is used after the trap host parameters have been configured. This will enable trap report-ing.

2 Under Creation This status is used while the trap host parameters are being configured.

3 Invalid This status is used to disable traps for the specified trap host.

Table 6-38. Trap Host Menu Option (Continued)




Auto Save Menu

The Auto Save menu (see Figure 6-73) provides the option to save provisioning settings each minute if enabled.

Figure 6-73. Auto Save Menu

The Auto Save menu options are shown in Table 6-40.

Table 6-40. Auto Save Menu Options


1 Disabled This option is used to disable the auto save option.

2 Enabled This option automatically saves current network settings at one minute intervals if any changes have been made.



Auto Save : Enabled

1 - Disabled

2 - Enabled

Will Save Provisioning Each Minute If Enabled




Security Administration Menu

The Security Administration menu (see Figure 6-74) provides access to all user accounts.

Figure 6-74. Security Administration Menu

The Security Administration menu options are shown in Table 6-41.

Table 6-41. Security Administration Menu Options


1 Users Currently Logged On This option displays the “Users Currently Logged On Screen” on page 6-112.

2 Edit User Accounts This option displays the “Edit Accounts Menu” on page 6-113.

3 Access Tech Support Account This option displays the “Access Tech Support Account Screen” on page 6-116.

4 Restore Default Security Settings This option is used to restore all security options to the default settings.



MX3112->Provisioning->Security Administration

1 - Users Currently Logged On

2 - Edit User Accounts

3 - Access Tech Support Account

4 - Restore Default Security Settings




Users Currently Logged On ScreenThe Users Currently Logged On screen (see Figure 6-75) displays all users currently logged in to the MX3112 system.

Figure 6-75. Users Currently Logged On Screen

The Users Currently Logged On screen fields are shown in Table 6-42.

Table 6-42. Users Currently Logged On Screen Fields

Field Description

Users Currently Logged On This field displays the number of users currently logged on.

USER This field displays the account name.

ACCESS This field displays the access as one of the following:• Craft. User is logged on through the front panel craft port of the

MX3112 controller card.• IP. User is logged on through a Telnet connection via the primary

(23) or secondary Telnet port.

TYPE This field displays the type as one of the following:• Menu• TL1 (This option is not available at this time.)

FROM This field displays the IP address if access is IP.

TIME This field displays the logon date and time.



Users Currently Logged On - 1

USER ACCESS TYPE FROM TIME

ADMIN IP Menu 172.22.117.239 01/01/05 12:00:00




Edit Accounts MenuThe Edit Accounts menu (see Figure 6-76) allows access to manage all user accounts.

Figure 6-76. Edit Accounts Menu

The Edit Accounts menu options are shown in Table 6-43.

The Edit Accounts menu hot key is shown in Table 6-44.

Table 6-45 provides the default account names and passwords for the MX3112 system.

Table 6-43. Edit Accounts Menu Options


1 - 4 USER This option is used to select the user account that will be configured.

Table 6-44. Edit Accounts Menu Hot Key

Hot Key Description Function

N New Account This hot key is used to create a new user account. Pressing the hot key displays a screen where the new user name can be entered. The new user account can then be selected from the Edit Accounts menu.



MX3112->Provisioning->Security Administration->Edit Accounts

Num USER STATUS NUM LOGINS ACCESS RIGHTS

1. ADMIN ENABLED 1 ADMIN

2. READONLY ENABLED 0 READ

3. READWRITE ENABLED 0 READ/WRITE

4. TEST ENABLED 0 TEST


(N)ew Account



* The Tech Support Account Level is established and accessed as directed by ADTRAN Technical Support during troubleshooting and analysis.

Table 6-45. Edit User Accounts Menu Options

Account Level Account Name Account Password

READ ONLY READONLY PASSWORD

READ/WRITE READWRITE PASSWORD

TEST TEST PASSWORD

ADMIN ADMIN PASSWORD

TECH SUPPORT* Challenge Key Response Key



Edit User Account MenuThe Edit User Account menu (see Figure 6-77) is used to edit or delete user accounts.

Figure 6-77. Edit User Account Menu

The Edit User Account menu options are shown in Table 6-46.

Table 6-46. Edit User Account Menu Options


1 Enable/Disable User Account This option is used to enable or disable an user account. Options are as follows:


The ADMIN account can not be disabled.

2 Access Rights This option sets the access rights level for the selected account. Options are as follows:

• READ. This level allows the user to see but not change the current system configuration.

• TEST. This level allows system testing.• READ/WRITE. This level allows the user to both

see and change system configuration parameters.

• ADMIN. This level is reserved for system or network administrators.

3 Change Password This option is used to enter a new password.

4 Delete User This option is used to delete a user account.



MX3112->Provisioning->Security Administration->Edit Accounts->Edit

User: ADMIN

1 - Enable/Disable User Account : ENABLED

2 - Access Rights : ADMIN

3 - Change Password

4 - Delete User




Access Tech Support Account ScreenThe Access Tech Support Account screen (see Figure 6-78) provides access to a technical support account.

Figure 6-78. Access Tech Support Account Screen

To receive a technical support response key, provide the challenge key that appears on the screen to an authorized Adtran factory representative. Refer to “ADTRAN Technical Support” on page A-1 for contact information. Entry of a valid response key will promote this menu session to the technical support level.



MX3112->Provisioning->Security Administration->Access Tech Support Account

Challenge Key: 865C7382

Enter Response Key:

To receive a Tech Support Account 'Response Key', provide the 'Challenge Key'

shown above to an authorized Adtran factory representative. Entry of a valid

Response Key will promote this menu session to the Tech Support level.




Quick Setup MenuTo simplify the installation process, all of the basic configuration options necessary to get the MX3112 system running are grouped together on the Quick Setup menu (see Figure 6-79 for copper mode and Figure 6-80 for DS3 mode). The Quick Setup menu allows configuration of such items as application mode and Ethernet client ports, as well as system date, time, IP Address information, and bonding group assignments.

CAUTIONChanging IP settings will terminate all active telnet sessions.

Figure 6-79. Quick Setup Menu (Copper Mode)



MX3112->Quick Setup


1 - COT/RT : RT 13 - 1 Disabled

2 - Copper/DS3 : Copper 14 - 2 Disabled

3 - Auto-Provisioning : Enabled 15 - 3 Disabled

16 - 4 Disabled




20 - 8 Disabled





9 - Gateway : 0.0.0.0

10 - Date : 01/01/2005

11 - Time : 12:00:00





Figure 6-80. Quick Setup Menu (DS3 Mode)

The Quick Setup menu options are shown in Table 6-47.

Table 6-47. Quick Setup Menu Options


1 1 COT/RT This option determines whether the MX3112 controller operates as the master (COT) or as the slave (RT). Options are as follows:

• COT• RT. This option is the default setting and is

typically used when the MX3112 system is connected to the OPTI-6100 GEFM.

When this option is set to COT mode, the transmit timing for the bonded DS1s is automatically provisioned as Local. When this option is set to RT mode, the transmit timing for the bonded DS1s is automatically provisioned as Loop. These timing options can be changed independently if needed.

• When operating in COT mode, the unit will periodically transmit certain provisioning information toward the RT device via the bonded DS1s. This information includes the bonding group assignments for each DS1.



MX3112->Quick Setup


1 - COT/RT : RT 13 - 13 Disabled

2 - Copper/DS3 : DS3 14 - 14 Disabled

3 - Auto-Provisioning : Enabled 15 - 15 Disabled

16 - 16 Disabled




20 - 20 Disabled





9 - Gateway : 0.0.0.0

10 - Date : 01/01/2005

11 - Time : 12:00:00





2 2 Copper/DS3 This parameter determines whether the network interface on the MX3112 system is configured for Copper Mode (twelve DS1s) or for DS3 Mode (channelized DS3). Options are as follows:

• Copper• DS3

Reference the “Application Guidelines” on page 3-1 for a detail explanation of this option.

3 3 Auto-Provisioning This option, which is only available when the system is provisioned for RT mode, is used to select the auto provisioning state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled. This option disables auto provisioning. When disabled, the unit will not respond to the bonding group assignment messages received from the COT system. The bonding group assignments must be performed manually.

• Enabled. This option enables auto provisioning. When enabled, the unit will respond to the bonding group assignment messages received from the COT system. The automatic provisioning will override any manual bonding group assignments performed at the RT. The System ID of the RT is sent to the COT. This parameter is typically programmed into the MX3112 system when it is installed and will allow a user friendly ID to be displayed on the configuration screen of the COT.

This option is not displayed when the COT/RT option is set to COT.

4 4 Select Ethernet Client Ports This option displays the “Ethernet Client Ports Menu” on page 6-90.

5 5 Packet Flows This option displays the “Packet Flows Menu” on page 6-83.

6 6 Rear Ethernet State This option is used to provision the Ethernet port on the rear of the MX3 chassis. Options are as fol-lows:


7 7 IP Address This option is used to enter the IP Address. The IP Address is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value between 000 and 255.

Table 6-47. Quick Setup Menu Options (Continued)




8 8 Subnet Mask This option is used to enter the subnet mask. A subnet mask is used to reduce the traffic on each subnetwork by confining traffic to only the subnet-work for which it was intended. A subnet mask makes the entire network more manageable. In effect, each subnet functions as though it were an independent network, keeping local traffic local and forwarding traffic to another subnet only if the address of the data is external to the subnet. The Subnet Mask is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value between 000 and 255.

9 9 Gateway This option is used to enter the default gateway/router between the internal network and the exter-nal network. The gateway address is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value between 000 and 255.

10 10 Date This option is used to enter the date.

11 11 Time This option is used to enter the time.

12 12 System ID This option is used to enter the system ID.

13-24

N/A Bonding Group 1 - 12 This option is used to enter the bonding group assignment for each DS1 port.

• Enter 1 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 1.




• Enter 0 to remove a DS1 from the assigned bonding group.





N/A 13-24

DS3 Tributary 13 - 24 This option is used to enter the bonding group assignment for each DS3 tributary.





• Enter 0 to remove a DS3 from the assigned bonding group.

When in RT mode and auto provisioning is enabled, the bonding group is automatically con-figured by the COT.





Status MenuThe Status menu (see Figure 6-81 for copper mode and Figure 6-82 for DS3 mode) provides summarized status information about the major areas of the system. Navigate to submenus to obtain more detailed information.

Figure 6-81. Status Menu (Copper Mode)

Figure 6-82. Status Menu (DS3 Mode)

The Status menu options are shown in Table 6-48.



MX3112->Status

1 - Controller Equipment 3 - Ethernet Client Ports

Active (Card A) : Normal <1-4> : Down Down Down Down


4 - DS1 Ports

2 - Environmental Alarms <1-4> : LOS LOS LOS LOS

State : Major <5-8> : LOS LOS LOS LOS

<9-12> : LOS LOS LOS LOS

5 - Bonding Group Status

<1-2> : OK N/A

<3-4> : N/A N/A

Timing : Loop




MX3112->Status

1 - Controller Equipment 4 - Ethernet Client Ports

Active (Card A) : Normal <1-4> : Down Down Down Down


5 - DS1 Ports

2 - DS3 (DS3 A) <1-4> : LOS LOS LOS LOS

State : DS3-ALARM <5-8> : LOS LOS LOS LOS

Status : LOS OOF DS2-OOF <9-12> : LOS LOS LOS LOS

3 - Environmental Alarms 6 - Bonding Group Status

State : Minor <1-2> : N/A N/A

<3-4> : N/A N/A

Timing : Loop




Table 6-48. Status Menu Options


1 1 Controller Equipment This option displays the “Controller Equipment Screen” on page 6-124.

N/A 2 DS3 This option displays the “DS3 Status Menu (DS3 Mode Only)” on page 6-126.

2 3 Environmental Alarms This option displays the “Environmental Alarms Screen” on page 6-130.

3 4 Ethernet Client Ports This option displays the “Ethernet Client Ports Screen” on page 6-132.

4 5 DS1 Ports This option displays the “DS1 Ports Status Screen” on page 6-133.

5 6 Bonding Group Status This option displays the “DS1 Bonding Group Sta-tus Screen” on page 6-135.



Controller Equipment Screen

The Controller Equipment screen (see Figure 6-83) displays the status of the active card, standby card, and alarms.

Figure 6-83. Controller Equipment Screen

The Controller Equipment screen fields are shown in Table 6-49.

Table 6-49. Controller Equipment Screen Fields

Field Description

Active This field displays the status of the active card as shown in Table 6-50.

Standby This field displays the status of the standby card as shown in Table 6-51.

Alarms This field displays the conditions of the alarms as shown in Table 6-52.

Table 6-50. Status for Active Card

Status Description

Normal Indicates normal operating mode.

Software Update Indicates software update in progress.

Max Switches Exceeded Indicates the maximum switching threshold has been exceeded.

Card Failure Indicates card failure has occurred.



MX3112->Status->Controller Equipment

Active (Card A) : Normal


Alarms : None




Table 6-51. Status for Standby Card

Status Description

Ready Indicates card is ready and acting as a backup module.

Not Installed Indicates card is not installed in the designated slot.

Software Update Indicates software update is in progress.

Not Ready Indicates card configuration is in progress.

Not Ready - Code Mis-match

Indicates active card should be reset to run new code.

Comm Failure Indicates modules are not able to communicate with each other.

Card Failure Indicates card has failed and should be replaced.

Table 6-52. Alarm Conditions

Condition Description

None Indicates no alarms.

Card Failure - Active Card Indicates active card has failed.

Card Failure - Standby Card

Indicates standby card has failed.

Switch to Protect Indicates a module switch has occurred.

Comm Failure Indicates the active and standby modules are not able to communicate with each other.

Code Mismatch Indicates code versions on active and standby cards do not match. Reset the active card to run new code.



DS3 Status Menu (DS3 Mode Only)

The DS3 Status menu (see Figure 6-84) displays the status for the DS3.

Figure 6-84. DS3 Status Menu

The DS3 Status menu fields are shown in Table 6-53.

Table 6-53. DS3 Status Menu Fields

Field Description

Alarm This field displays the conditions of the alarms as shown in Table 6-54.

Rx Status This field displays the current status of the network. Possible states are as follows:

• OK• LOS• OOF• AIS• RAI• IDLE

Rx Framing This field displays the network framing type. Types are as follows:• C-bit• M23• Unknown

Rx FEAC This field displays the conditions of the remote system shown in Table 6-55.



MX3112->Status->DS3

DS3

Alarm : LOS OOF Tx Clock Source : Local

Rx Status : LOS OOF Tx Framing : M23

Rx Framing : Unknown Test Status : No Test

Rx FEAC : Unknown

DS2s

<1-7> OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF

DS1 Tributaries in DS3

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIS

TEST

1 - Go to Test Menu for DS1s in DS3




Tx Clock Source This field displays the network clock source. Types are as follows:• Loop• Local

Tx Framing This field displays the network framing type. Types are as follows:• C-bit• M23

Test Status This field displays the current test status of the network. Possible states are as follows:

• No Test• Line Loopback• Digital Loopback• Remote Loopback• Remote ALL T1• Far Requested Line

DS2s 1-7 This field displays the conditions of the seven DS2s as shown in Table 6-56.

Table 6-54. Alarm Conditions


None Indicates no alarms are currently being received.

RAI Indicates the MX3112 system is receiving an Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.

LOS Indicates the MX3112 system has lost the Rx signal.

AIS Indicates the MX3112 system is receiving an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) (blue) alarm from the network. AIS alarms occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits. This indicates there is a transmission fault located either at the transmitting terminal or upstream from the transmitting terminal.

OOF Indicates the MX3112 system detects a framing loss from the network.

XCV Indicates the MX3112 system is receiving excessive code violations from the network, which are exceeding the threshold set by the XCV Threshold parameter.

IDLE Indicates the MX3112 system detects an idle sequence from the network. Service is immediately available for use.

FEAC Indicates the MX3112 system is receiving an alarm from the far end DS3 system.

Table 6-53. DS3 Status Menu Fields (Continued)

Field Description



Table 6-55. Remote System Conditions


Normal Indicates the far end MX3112 system is not reporting any conditions.

DS3 RAI Indicates the far end unit is receiving an Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.

DS3 LOS Indicates the far end unit has lost the Rx signal.

DS3 AIS Indicates the far end unit is receiving an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) (blue) alarm condition from the network. AIS alarms occur when con-secutive 1010s are received in the information bits. This indicates there is a transmission fault located either at the transmitting terminal or upstream from the transmitting terminal.

DS3 LOF Indicates the far end unit detects a framing loss, Loss of Frame (LOF), from the network.

DS3 Idle Indicates the far end unit detects an idle sequence from the network.

DS3 Eqpt Fail (SA) Indicates the far end unit or network is reporting a service-affecting (SA) DS3 equipment failure.

DS3 Eqpt Fail (NSA) Indicates the far end unit or network is reporting a non-service-affect-ing (NSA) DS3 equipment failure.

Common Eqpt Fail Indicates the far end unit or network is reporting a non-service-affect-ing common equipment failure.

Multiple DS1 LOS Indicates the far end unit is experiencing a loss of signal on multiple DS1s.

Single DS1 LOS Indicates the far end unit is experiencing a loss of signal on a single DS1.

DS1 Eqpt Fail (SA) Indicates the far end unit is experiencing a service-affecting DS1 equip-ment failure.

DS1 Eqpt Fail (NSA) Indicates the far end unit is experiencing a non-service-affecting DS1 equipment failure.

Unknown Indicates the unit is unable to discern the status of the far end unit. (Normal state for M13 framing.)



The DS3 Status menu option is shown in Table 6-57.

Table 6-56. DS2 Conditions


OK Indicates the DS2 is not receiving alarms.

OOF Indicates the unit detects a framing loss across the DS2.

RAI Indicates the unit is receiving a RAI (yellow) alarm from the network across a DS2. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bit is set to zero.

AIS Indicates the unit is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network across the DS2. AIS alarms occur when the unit receives unframed all ones.

Table 6-57. DS3 Status Menu Option


1 Go to Test Menu for DS1s in DS3 A/B

This option displays the “DS1s in DS3 Menu (DS3 Mode Only)” on page 6-146.



Environmental Alarms Screen

The Environmental Alarms screen (see Figure 6-85) displays the status of the DS1 ports.

Figure 6-85. Environmental Alarms Screen

The Environmental Alarms screen fields are shown in Table 6-58.

Table 6-58. Environmental Alarms Screen Fields

Field Description

External Inputs This field displays the external inputs as shown in Table 6-59.

Alarm Status This field displays the alarm status as one of the following:• Active• Inactive

Level This field displays the alarm level as one of the following:• Disabled• Info• Alert• Minor• Major• Critical• N/A (ACO Only)



MX3112->Status->Environmental Alarms

External Inputs Alarm Status Level

AUX #1 Input Inactive Major




PWR BUS A Inactive Major

PWR BUS B Active Major

ACO Status Inactive N/A




Table 6-59. Environmental Alarm External Inputs

External Input Description

AUX #1 Input This input indicates open or closed relay contacts for AUX #1.




PWR BUS A This input generates an alarm signal when power feed A fails. When both power feeds fail, a critical alarm will not be generated. A complete power failure at the MX3112 system is detected by communication loss at attached devices.

PWR BUS B This input generates an alarm signal when power feed B fails. When both power feeds fail, a critical alarm will not be generated. A complete power failure at the MX3112 system is detected by communication loss at attached devices.

ACO Status This field displays the current status of the ACO inputs. This includes the front panel ACO switch and any auxiliary inputs configured as ACO.



Ethernet Client Ports Screen

The Ethernet Client Ports screen (see Figure 6-86) displays the current link status and link speed and duplex of each Ethernet client port.

Figure 6-86. Ethernet Client Ports Screen

The Ethernet Client Ports screen fields are shown in Table 6-60.

Table 6-60. Ethernet Client Ports Screen Fields

Field Description

Port This field displays the Ethernet client port number.

Link Status This field displays the current status as either Up or Down.

Link Speed & Duplex This field displays one of the following speeds as active:• 10 Mbps, Half• 100 Mbps, Half• 10 Mbps, Full• 100 Mbps, Full• Unknown



MX3112->Status->Ethernet Client Ports

Port Link Status Link Speed & Duplex

1 Up 100, Full

2 Up 100, Full

3 Up 100, Full

4 Up 100, Full




DS1 Ports Status Screen

The DS1 Ports Status screen (see Figure 6-87) displays the test status for each DS1 port.

Figure 6-87. DS1 Ports Status Screen

The DS1 Ports Status screen fields are shown in Table 6-61.

Table 6-61. DS1 Ports Status Screen Fields

Field Description

DS1 Port This field displays the DS1 port number.

Status This field displays the current line status of the DS1 ports. The possible states are as follows:

• OK• CV• AIS• LOS• AUTO• OFF



MX3112->Status->DS1 Ports

DS1 Port Status Test

1 LOS No Test

2 LOS No Test

3 LOS No Test

4 LOS No Test

5 LOS No Test

6 LOS No Test

7 LOS No Test

8 LOS No Test

9 LOS No Test

10 LOS No Test

11 LOS No Test

12 LOS No Test




Test This field displays the current test status of the DS1 ports. The possible states are as follows:

• No Test. Indicates no tests are active.• Analog Network• Digital Line• CSU Loopback• CSU LB w/ Pattern• NIU Loopback• NIU LB w/ Pattern• Pattern Test• Far Requested Analog Net

Table 6-61. DS1 Ports Status Screen Fields (Continued)

Field Description



DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen

The DS1 Bonding Group Status screen (see Figure 6-88 for copper mode and Figure 6-89 for DS3 mode) displays the current status for each DS1 bonding group and each DS1 port.

Figure 6-88. DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen (Copper Mode)

Figure 6-89. DS1 Bonding Groups Status Screen (DS3 Mode)

The DS1 Bonding Group Status screen fields are shown in Table 6-62.



MX3112->Status->DS1 Bonding Groups

| Unbonded | Group 1 | Group 2 | Group 3 | Group 4

| | OK | OK | OK | OK

| | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4

DS1 | | | | |

Port | Status | Status Skew | Status Skew | Status Skew | Status Skew

1 | | OK 0.0 | | |

2 | | OK 0.0 | | |

3 | | OK 0.0 | | |

4 | | | OK 0.0 | |

5 | | | OK 0.0 | |

6 | | | OK 0.0 | |

7 | | | | OK 0.0 |

8 | | | | OK 0.0 |

9 | | | | OK 0.0 |

10 | | | | | OK 0.0

11 | | | | | OK 0.0

12 | | | | | OK 0.0

Relative skew is displayed in milliseconds. '?' - System Help Screen



MX3112->Status->DS1 Bonding Groups

| Unbonded | Group 1 | Group 2 | Group 3 | Group 4

| | OK | OK | OK | OK

| | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4

DS3 | | | | |

Trib | Status | Status Skew | Status Skew | Status Skew | Status Skew

1 | | OK 0.0 | | |

2 | | OK 0.0 | | |

3 | | OK 0.0 | | |

4 | | | OK 0.0 | |

5 | | | OK 0.0 | |

6 | | | OK 0.0 | |

7 | | | | OK 0.0 |

8 | | | | OK 0.0 |

9 | | | | OK 0.0 |

10 | | | | | OK 0.0

11 | | | | | OK 0.0

12 | | | | | OK 0.0

Relative skew is displayed in milliseconds. '?' - System Help Screen



Table 6-62. DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen Fields

Field Description

Group 1 - 4 This field displays the status of each bonding group. The possible states are as follows:

• N/A. Indicates no DS1s are bonded to this group.• OK. Indicates the status of all DS1s bonded to a group is OK.• PARTIAL. Indicates an error condition exists on all but at least one

of the DS1s in a bonded group.• DOWN. Indicates an error condition exists on all of the DS1s in a

bonded group.

Skew Thrs This field displays the provisioned skew threshold (in milliseconds) for the bonding group.

DS1 Status This field displays the possible states in order of precedence of each DS1 port as shown in Table 6-63.

Skew Status This field displays the relative skew value of each DS1 in a bonded group. N/A is displayed if an error condition prevents calculation.

Table 6-63. DS1 Port States

Status Description

OK Indicates the DS1 is okay (no anomalies).

SKEW Indicates the measured skew for the DS1 has exceeded the provisioned threshold.

NO SYNC Indicates loss of synchronization at the DS1 interface of the bonding engine with the far end system.

FE FAIL Indicates a problem has been detected at the far end system.

CRC Indicates coding violations are detected, with a rate is below the provisioned threshold.

LOF Indicates loss of frame.

XCV Indicates coding violations are detected, with a rate in excess of the provisioned threshold.

RAI Indicates a Remote Alarm Indication is received.

TEST Indicates a loopback is activated on this system.

DISABLE Indicates the state option of the DS1 is provisioned as disabled.

NE OOS Indicates the DS1 state has been provisioned out-of-service on the main system.



FE OOS Indicates the DS1 state has been provisioned out-of-service on the far end system.

LINK ID Indicates a link ID mismatch is detected on the DS1 (the received value is not equal to the expected value).

LPBK Indicates an external loopback is detected on the DS1.

Table 6-63. DS1 Port States (Continued)

Status Description



Test MenuThe Test menu (see Figure 6-90 for copper mode and Figure 6-91 for DS3 mode) provides options for testing the DS1 Ports.

Figure 6-90. Test Menu (Copper Mode)

Figure 6-91. Test Menu (DS3 Mode)

The Test menu options are shown in Table 6-64.



MX3112->Test

DS1 Ports

1 - # 1 : No Test 14 - Test Alarm Relays

2 - # 2 : No Test 15 - Reset ALL Tests

3 - # 3 : No Test 16 - Test Timeout : 5 minutes

4 - # 4 : No Test 17 - Pattern : QRSS

5 - # 5 : No Test

6 - # 6 : No Test

7 - # 7 : No Test

8 - # 8 : No Test

9 - # 9 : No Test

10 - #10 : No Test

11 - #11 : No Test

12 - #12 : No Test

13 - Bonding DS1s




MX3112->Test

DS1 Ports

1 - # 1 : No Test 14 - DS3 : No Test

2 - # 2 : No Test

3 - # 3 : No Test 15 - DS1s in DS3 : No Test

4 - # 4 : No Test

5 - # 5 : No Test 16 - Test Alarm Relays

6 - # 6 : No Test 17 - Reset ALL Tests

7 - # 7 : No Test 18 - Test Timeout : 5 minutes

8 - # 8 : No Test 19 - Pattern : QRSS

9 - # 9 : No Test

10 - #10 : No Test

11 - #11 : No Test

12 - #12 : No Test

13 - Bonding DS1s




Table 6-64. Test Menu Options


1 - 12

1 - 12

DS1 Ports #1 - #12 This option displays the “DS1 Port Test Menu” on page 6-140.

13 N/A Bonding DS1s This option displays the “Bonding DS1s Menu (Copper Mode Only)” on page 6-142.

N/A 13 Bonding DS1s This option displays the “Bonding DS1s Menu (DS3 Mode Only)” on page 6-143.

N/A 14 DS3 This option displays the “DS3 Test Menu (DS3 Mode Only)” on page 6-145.

N/A 15 DS1s in DS3 This option displays the “DS1s in DS3 Menu (DS3 Mode Only)” on page 6-146.

14 16 Test Alarm Relays This option displays the “Test Alarm Relays Menu” on page 6-149.

15 17 Reset ALL Tests This option is used to cancel all test and return all test to data mode.

16 18 Test Timeout This option is used to select the test timeout. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• 1 minute• 5 minutes• 10 minutes• 15 minutes• 30 minutes• 45 minutes• 60 minutes

17 19 Pattern This option is used to select the test pattern used by the internal BERT. Options are as follows:

• QRSS• ALL ONES• ALL ZEROS• 2 IN 8 (2:6)• 1 IN 8 (1:7)• 2^15-1 INV



DS1 Port Test Menu

The DS1 Port Test menu (see Figure 6-92) provides testing options that can be run on the DS1 ports.

CAUTIONEnabling a test will interrupt customer payload on the selected DS1 port.

Figure 6-92. DS1 Port Test Menu

The DS1 Port Test menu options are shown in Table 6-65.

Table 6-65. DS1 Port Test Menu Options


1 No Test When this mode is selected, no test are active and the customer payload is uninterrupted.

2 Analog Network This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3 in DS3 mode or the DSX-1 line interface in copper mode.

3 Digital Line This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DSX-1 line interface.

4 CSU Loopback This test sends CSU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line.



DS1 Port #1 Test : No Test

1 - No Test

2 - Analog Network

3 - Digital Line

4 - CSU Loopback

5 - CSU LB w/ Pattern

6 - NIU Loopback

7 - NIU LB w/ Pattern

8 - Pattern Test




5 CSU LB w/ Pattern This test sends CSU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line and sends test patterns using the internal BERT.

6 NIU Loopback This test sends NIU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line.

7 NIU LB w/ Pattern This test sends NIU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line and sends test patterns using the internal BERT.

8 Pattern Test This test sends test patterns using the internal BERT.

Table 6-65. DS1 Port Test Menu Options (Continued)




Bonding DS1s Menu (Copper Mode Only)

The Bonding DS1s menu (see Figure 6-93) is used to select the type of test to be performed on each DS1 port.

Figure 6-93. Bonding DS1s Menu

The Bonding DS1s menu options are shown in Table 6-66.

Table 6-66. Bonding DS1s Menu Options


1 - 12 DS1 Port 1 - 12 This option is used to select the type of test to be performed. A description of each test is shown in Table 6-67.

Table 6-67. Bonded DS1 Tests

Test Description

No Test No test is activated.

Line This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3 in DS3 mode or the DSX-1 line interface in copper mode. All data is looped back, including framing and payload data.

Payload This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3 in DS3 mode or the DSX-1 line interface in copper mode. The payload data is looped back, whereas the framing is regenerated.



MX3112->Test->Bonding DS1s

DS1 Port Test

1 - 1 No Test

2 - 2 No Test

3 - 3 No Test

4 - 4 No Test

5 - 5 No Test

6 - 6 No Test

7 - 7 No Test

8 - 8 No Test

9 - 9 No Test

10 - 10 No Test

11 - 11 No Test

12 - 12 No Test




Bonding DS1s Menu (DS3 Mode Only)

The Bonding DS1s menu (see Figure 6-94) is used to select the test to be performed on each DS3 tributary.

CAUTIONEnabling a test on a DS3 will interrupt customer payload on all DS1s transported over the DS3.

Figure 6-94. Bonding DS1s Menu

The Bonding DS1s menu options are shown in Table 6-68.

Table 6-68. Bonding DS1s Menu Options


1 - 12 DS3 Trib 13 - 24 This option is used to select the type of test to be performed. A description of each test is shown in Table 6-69.



MX3112->Test->Bonding DS1s

DS3 Trib Test

1 - 13 No Test

2 - 14 No Test

3 - 15 No Test

4 - 16 No Test

5 - 17 No Test

6 - 18 No Test

7 - 19 No Test

8 - 20 No Test

9 - 21 No Test

10 - 22 No Test

11 - 23 No Test

12 - 24 No Test




Table 6-69. DS1 Tributary Tests

Test Description

No Test No test is activated.

Line This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3. All data is looped back, including framing and payload data.

Payload This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3. The payload data is looped back, whereas the framing is regenerated.



DS3 Test Menu (DS3 Mode Only)

The DS3 Test menu (see Figure 6-95) provides testing options that can be run on the DS3.

CAUTIONEnabling a test on a DS3 will interrupt customer payload on all DS1s transported over the DS3.

Figure 6-95. DS3 Test Menu

The DS3 Test menu options are shown in Table 6-70.

Table 6-70. DS3 Test Menu Options



2 Line Loopback This test loops towards the DS3 line but excludes the DS3 framer.

3 Digital Loopback This test loops the DS3 toward the DS1 tributaries.

4 Remote Loopback (C-bit Only) This test performs a line loopback at the equipment on the other end of the DS3.

5 Remote ALL T1 (C-bit Only) This test performs a tributary loopback on all DS1s in the DS3 at the equipment on the other end of the DS3.



DS3 Test : No Test

1 - No Test

2 - Line Loopback

3 - Digital Loopback

4 - Remote Loopback

5 - Remote ALL T1




DS1s in DS3 Menu (DS3 Mode Only)

The DS1s in DS3 menu (see Figure 6-96) displays the test that is selected for each of the tributaries.

Figure 6-96. DS1s in DS3 Menu

The DS1s in DS3 menu options are shown in Table 6-71.

Table 6-71. DS1s in DS3 Menu Options


1 - 28 DS1 Ports #1 - 28 This option displays the “DS1 in DS3 Test Menu (DS3 Mode Only)” on page 6-147.



MX3112->Test->DS1s in DS3

1 - No Test 15 - No Test

















DS1 in DS3 Test Menu (DS3 Mode Only)The DS1 in DS3 Test menu (see Figure 6-97) provides testing options that can be run on each tributary.

Figure 6-97. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu

The DS1 in DS3 Test menu options are shown in Table 6-72.

Table 6-72. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu Options



2 Tributary Loopback This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3.

3 Remote Loopback This test performs a tributary loopback on the selected DS1 in the DS3 terminated at the connecting equipment.

4 Remote Loopback w/ Pattern This test activates a remote loopback at the far end system, and then, generates a test pattern toward that loopback.

5 CSU Loopback This test sends CSU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line.

6 CSU LB w/ Pattern This test sends CSU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line and sends test patterns using the internal BERT.



DS1 #1 in DS3 Test : No Test

1 - No Test

2 - Tributary Loopback

3 - Remote Loopback

4 - Remote Loopback w/ Pattern

5 - CSU Loopback

6 - CSU LB w/ Pattern

7 - NIU Loopback

8 - NIU LB w/ Pattern

9 - Pattern Test




7 NIU Loopback This test sends NIU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line.

8 NIU LB w/ Pattern This test sends NIU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line and sends test patterns using the internal BERT.

9 Pattern Test This test sends test patterns using the internal BERT.

Table 6-72. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu Options (Continued)




Test Alarm Relays Menu

The Test Alarm Relays menu with the Alarm Relay Test Status option set to Inactive is shown in Figure 6-98. Figure 6-99 shows the Test Alarm Relays menu with the Alarm Relay Test Status option set to Active.

Figure 6-98. Test Alarm Relays Menu with Inactive Alarm Relay Test Status

Figure 6-99. Test Alarm Relays Menu with Active Alarm Relay Test Status



MX3112->Test->Test Alarm Relays

1 - Alarm Relay Test Status : Inactive




MX3112->Test->Test Alarm Relays

1 - Alarm Relay Test Status : Active

2 - Toggle Critical Relay : Active

3 - Toggle Major Relay : Active

4 - Toggle Minor Relay : Active

5 - Toggle All Relays




The Test Alarm Relays menu options are shown in Table 6-73.

Table 6-73. Test Alarm Relays Menu Options

Option Field Description

1 Alarm Relay Test Status This option is used to enable or disable the alarm relay test. Options are as follows:

• Inactive. Test is disabled.• Active. Test is enabled. Options 2 -5 are visible

when this option is selected.

2 Toggle Critical Relay This option is a toggle key to change between Inactive and Active status.

3 Toggle Major Relay This option is a toggle key to change between Inactive and Active status.

4 Toggle Minor Relay This option is a toggle key to change between Inactive and Active status.

5 Toggle All Relays This option is a toggle key to change between Inactive and Active status for all alarm relays at once.



Performance Monitoring MenuThe Performance Monitoring menu (see Figure 6-100 for copper mode and Figure 6-101 for DS3 mode) allows access to all performance monitoring options.

Figure 6-100. Performance Monitoring Menu (Copper Mode)

Figure 6-101. Performance Monitoring Menu (DS3 Mode)

The Performance Monitoring menu options are shown in Table 6-74.



MX3112->PM

1 - DS1 Port Statistics

2 - DS1 Bonding Statistics

3 - Bonding Group Statistics

4 - Ethernet Client Statistics

5 - Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data

6 - Reset ALL PM Data

7 - Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults

8 - Enable ALL PM Thresholds

9 - Disable ALL PM Thresholds




MX3112->PM

1 - DS3 Statistics

2 - DS1 Port Statistics

3 - DS1 Bonding Statistics

4 - Bonding Group Statistics

5 - Ethernet Client Statistics

6 - Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data

7 - Reset ALL PM Data

8 - Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults

9 - Enable ALL PM Thresholds

10 - Disable ALL PM Thresholds




Table 6-74. Performance Monitoring Menu Options


N/A 1 DS3 Statistics This option displays the “DS3 Stats Menu (DS3 Mode Only)” on page 6-153.

1 2 DS1 Port Statistics This option displays the “DS1 Port Stats Menu” on page 6-165.

2 3 DS1 Bonding Statistics This option displays the “DS1 Bonding Stats Menu” on page 6-171.

3 4 Bonding Group Statistics This option displays the “Bonding Group Stats Menu” on page 6-186.

4 5 Ethernet Client Statistics This option displays the “Ethernet Stats Menu” on page 6-192.

5 6 Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data

This option is used to reset all current interval performance monitoring data.

6 7 Reset ALL PM Data This option is used to reset all performance monitoring data.

7 8 Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults

This option is used to reset all performance monitoring thresholds to the defaults.

8 9 Enable ALL PM Thresholds This option is used to enable all performance monitoring thresholds.

9 10 Disable ALL PM Thresholds This option is used to disable all performance monitoring thresholds.



DS3 Stats Menu (DS3 Mode Only)

The DS3 Stats menu (see Figure 6-102) allows access to view all DS3 performance monitoring statistics and thresholds.

Figure 6-102. DS3 Stats Menu

The DS3 Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-75.

Table 6-75. DS3 Stats Menu Options

Option Description Field

1 Near End Daily This option displays the “Near End Daily Screen” on page 6-156.

2 Near End Quarter Hourly This option displays the “Near End Quarter Hourly Menu” on page 6-157.

3 Far End Daily This option displays the “Far End Daily Screen” on page 6-158.

4 Far End Quarter Hourly This option displays the “Far End Quarter Hourly Menu” on page 6-159.

5 Near End Daily Thresholds This option displays the “Near End Thresholds Menu” on page 6-161.

6 Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds

This option displays the “Near End Thresholds Menu” on page 6-161.

7 Far End Daily Thresholds This option displays the “Far End Thresholds Menu” on page 6-163.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats

1 - Near End Daily

2 - Near End Quarter Hourly

3 - Far End Daily

4 - Far End Quarter Hourly

5 - Near End Daily Thresholds

6 - Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds

7 - Far End Daily Thresholds

8 - Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds

9 - Reset DS3 Current Interval PM Data

10 - Reset DS3 PM Data




Table 6-76 provides descriptions for the DS3 near end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens. Table 6-77 provides descriptions for the DS3 far end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens. The CP-bit parameter descriptions apply to C-bit framing only. This includes the near end CVCP-P, ESCP-P, SESCP-P, and UASCP-P, and the far end CVCP-PFE, ESCP-PFE, SESCP-PFE, and UASCP-PFE. “N/A” will be displayed for these parameters when M13 framing is selected.

8 Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds This option displays the “Far End Thresholds Menu” on page 6-163.

9 Reset DS3 Current Interval PM Data

This option is used to reset the DS3 current interval PM data.

10 Reset DS3 PM Data This option is used to reset the DS3 PM data.

Table 6-76. DS3 Near End Parameter Descriptions

Parameter Definition Description

CV-L Code Violation - Line This parameter indicates the number of Bipolar Violations (BPVs) and Excessive Zeros (EXZs) that have occurred.

ES-L Errored Second - Line This parameter indicates the number of seconds in which one or more Coding Violations (CVs) or one or more Loss-of-Signal (LOS) defects occurred.

SES-L Severely Errored Second - Line

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 45 or more BPVs and EXZs, or one or more LOS defects.

LOSS-L Loss of Signal Second - Line

This parameter indicates the number of seconds for which one or more LOS defects occurred.

CVP-P Code Violation, P-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of P-bit parity errors that have occurred. This count is not incremented when Unavailable Seconds (UASP-P) are counted.

ESP-P Errored Second, P-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with one or more P-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) defects. This count is not incremented when UASP-P are counted.

SESP-P Severely Errored Second, P-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 45 or more P-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one ore more AIS defects. This count is not incremented when UASP-P are counted.

UASP-P Unavailable Second, P-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds that the DS3 path is unavailable. UASP-P accumulates at the onset of 10 contiguous SESP-Ps and stop accumulating at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds without SESP-Ps.

Table 6-75. DS3 Stats Menu Options (Continued)




CVCP-P Code Violation, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of CP-bit parity errors that have occurred. This count is not incremented when UASCP-P are counted.

ESCP-P Errored Second, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with one or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects. This count is not incremented when UASCP-P are counted.

SESCP-P Severely Errored Second, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 45 or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects. This count is not incremented when UASCP-P are counted.

UASCP-P Unavailable Second, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds that the DS3 path is unavailable. UASCP-P accumulates at the onset of 10 contiguous SESCP-Ps and stop accumulating at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds without SESCP-Ps.

Table 6-77. DS3 Far End Parameter Descriptions


CVCP-PFE Code Violation, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of CP-bit parity errors that have occurred. This count is not incremented when UAS are counted.

ESCP-PFE Errored Second, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with one or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) defects. This count is not incremented when UASCP-PFE are counted.

SESCP-PFE Severely Errored Second, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 45 or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects. This count is not incremented when UASCP-PFE are counted.

UASCP-PFE Unavailable Second, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds that the DS3 path is unavailable. UASP-PFE accumulates at the onset of 10 contiguous SESCP-PFEs and stop accumulating at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds without SESCP-PFEs.

Table 6-76. DS3 Near End Parameter Descriptions (Continued)




Near End Daily ScreenThe Near End Daily screen (see Figure 6-103) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days.

Figure 6-103. Near End Daily Screen

Table 6-76 on page 154 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Near End Daily screen.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Daily

Current 01/01 01/02 01/03 01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07

CV-L : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ES-L : 43 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

SES-L : 43 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

LOSS-L : 43 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

CVP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ESP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SESP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

UASP-P : 43 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

CVCP-P : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

ESCP-P : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

SESCP-P : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

UASCP-P : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a




Near End Quarter Hourly MenuThe Near End Quarter Hourly menu (see Figure 6-104) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Near End Quarter Hourly menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-105).

Figure 6-104. Near End Quarter Hourly Menu

Table 6-76 on page 154 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Near End Quarter Hourly menu.

Figure 6-105. 24-Hour History Screen



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Quarter Hourly

Current 13:30 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30 12:15 12:00

1 - CV-L : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 - ES-L : 3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

3 - SES-L : 3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

4 - LOSS-L : 3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

5 - CVP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6 - ESP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7 - SESP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

8 - UASP-P : 3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

9 - CVCP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

10 - ESCP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

11 - SESCP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

12 - UASCP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0




MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Quarter Hourly->CV-L

09:45 0 05:30 0 01:15 0 21:00 0 16:45 0 12:30 0

09:30 0 05:15 0 01:00 0 20:45 0 16:30 0 12:15 0

09:15 0 05:00 0 00:45 0 20:30 0 16:15 0 12:00 0

09:00 0 04:45 0 00:30 0 20:15 0 16:00 0 11:45 0

08:45 0 04:30 0 00:15 0 20:00 0 15:45 0 11:30 0

08:30 0 04:15 0 00:00 0 19:45 0 15:30 0 11:15 0

08:15 0 04:00 0 23:45 0 19:30 0 15:15 0 11:00 0

08:00 0 03:45 0 23:30 0 19:15 0 15:00 0 10:45 0

07:45 0 03:30 0 23:15 0 19:00 0 14:45 0 10:30 0

07:30 0 03:15 0 23:00 0 18:45 0 14:30 0 10:15 0

07:15 0 03:00 0 22:45 0 18:30 0 14:15 0 10:00 0

07:00 0 02:45 0 22:30 0 18:15 0 14:00 0 09:45 0

06:45 0 02:30 0 22:15 0 18:00 0 13:45 0

06:30 0 02:15 0 22:00 0 17:45 0 13:30 0

06:15 0 02:00 0 21:45 0 17:30 0 13:15 0

06:00 0 01:45 0 21:30 0 17:15 0 13:00 0

05:45 0 01:30 0 21:15 0 17:00 0 12:45 0



Far End Daily ScreenThe Far End Daily screen (see Figure 6-106) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days.

NOTEThese statistics do not apply if the DS3 framing is set to M23.

Figure 6-106. Far End Daily Screen

Table 6-77 on page 155 provides definitions for the parameters used on Far End Daily screen.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Daily

Current 01/01 01/02 01/03 01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07

CVCP-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

ESCP-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

SESCP-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

UASCP-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a




Far End Quarter Hourly MenuThe Far End Quarter Hourly menu (see Figure 6-107) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Far End Quarter Hourly menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-108).

NOTEThese statistics do not apply if the DS3 framing is set to M23.

Figure 6-107. Far End Quarter Hourly Menu

Table 6-77 on page 155 provides definitions for the parameters used on Far End Quarter Hourly menu.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Quarterly Hourly

Current 14:00 13:45 13:30 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30

1 - CVCP-PFE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 - ESCP-PFE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 - SESCP-PFE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 - UASCP-PFE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0







MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Quarterly Hourly->CVCP-PFE

10:15 0 06:00 0 01:45 0 21:30 0 17:15 0 13:00 0

10:00 0 05:45 0 01:30 0 21:15 0 17:00 0 12:45 0

09:45 0 05:30 0 01:15 0 21:00 0 16:45 0 12:30 0

09:30 0 05:15 0 01:00 0 20:45 0 16:30 0 12:15 0

09:15 0 05:00 0 00:45 0 20:30 0 16:15 0 12:00 0

09:00 0 04:45 0 00:30 0 20:15 0 16:00 0 11:45 0

08:45 0 04:30 0 00:15 0 20:00 0 15:45 0 11:30 0

08:30 0 04:15 0 00:00 0 19:45 0 15:30 0 11:15 0

08:15 0 04:00 0 23:45 0 19:30 0 15:15 0 11:00 0

08:00 0 03:45 0 23:30 0 19:15 0 15:00 0 10:45 0

07:45 0 03:30 0 23:15 0 19:00 0 14:45 0 10:30 0

07:30 0 03:15 0 23:00 0 18:45 0 14:30 0 10:15 0

07:15 0 03:00 0 22:45 0 18:30 0 14:15 0

07:00 0 02:45 0 22:30 0 18:15 0 14:00 0

06:45 0 02:30 0 22:15 0 18:00 0 13:45 0

06:30 0 02:15 0 22:00 0 17:45 0 13:30 0

06:15 0 02:00 0 21:45 0 17:30 0 13:15 0



Near End Thresholds MenuThe Near End Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-109) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-109 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Near End Daily Thresholds menu and the Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.

Figure 6-109. Near End Thresholds Menu

The Near End Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-78.

Table 6-78. Near End Thresholds Menu Options


1 - 12 Near End Parameters (refer to Table 6-76 on page 154 for definitions)

These options display the “Threshold and Alarm Menu” on page 6-162.

13 Reset ALL DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults

This option is used to reset all DS3 PM thresholds to the factory defaults.

14 Enable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds This option is used to enable all DS3 PM thresholds.

15 Disable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds This option is used to disable all DS3 PM thresholds.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Daily Thresholds

Threshold Alarm

1 - CV-L : 3865 Disabled

2 - ES-L : 250 Disabled

3 - SES-L : 40 Disabled

4 - LOSS-L : 20 Disabled

5 - CVP-P : 3820 Disabled

6 - ESP-P : 250 Disabled

7 - SESP-P : 40 Disabled

8 - UASP-P : 10 Disabled

9 - CVCP-P : 3820 Disabled

10 - ESCP-P : 250 Disabled

11 - SESCP-P : 40 Disabled

12 - UASCP-P : 10 Disabled

13 - Reset ALL DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults

14 - Enable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds

15 - Disable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds




Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-110) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-110 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the DS3 near end parameters.

Figure 6-110. Threshold and Alarm Menu

The Threshold and Alarm menu options are shown in Table 6-79.

Table 6-79. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options


1 Threshold This option is used to enter the desired threshold.

2 Alarm This option is used to enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Daily Thresholds->CV-L

1 - CV-L Threshold : 3865

2 - CV-L Alarm : Disabled




Far End Thresholds MenuThe Far End Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-111) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-111 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Far End Daily Thresholds menu and the Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.

Figure 6-111. Far End Thresholds Menu

The Far End Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-80.

Table 6-80. Far End Thresholds Menu Options


1 - 12 Far End Parameters (refer to Table 6-77 on page 155 for definitions)


13 Reset ALL DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults

This option is used to reset all DS3 PM thresholds to the factory defaults.

14 Enable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds This option is used to enable all DS3 PM thresholds.

15 Disable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds This option is used to disable all DS3 PM thresholds.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Daily Thresholds

Threshold Alarm

1 - CVCP-PFE : 3820 Disabled

2 - ESCP-PFE : 250 Disabled

3 - SESCP-PFE : 40 Disabled

4 - UASCP-PFE : 10 Disabled

5 - Reset ALL DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults

6 - Enable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds

7 - Disable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds




Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-112) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-110 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the DS3 far end parameters.









MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Daily Thresholds->CVCP-PFE

1 - CVCP-PFE Threshold : 3820

2 - CVCP-PFE Alarm : Disabled




DS1 Port Stats Menu

The DS1 Port Stats menu (see Figure 6-113) allows access to DS1 port statistics.

Figure 6-113. DS1 Port Stats Menu

The DS1 Port Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-82.

Table 6-82. DS1 Port Stats Menu Options


1 - 12 DS1 #1 - #12 [PM Data] This option displays the “DS1 # Port Stats Menu” on page 6-166.

13 Reset ALL DS1 Port Current Interval PM Data

This option is used to reset current interval performance monitoring data for all DS1 ports.

14 Reset ALL DS1 Port PM Data This option is used to reset all performance monitoring data for all DS1 ports.

15 Reset ALL DS1 Port Thresholds This option is used to reset thresholds for all DS1 ports.

16 Enable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds This option is used to enable thresholds for all DS1 ports.

17 Disable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds This option is used to disable thresholds for all DS1 ports.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats

1 - DS1 # 1 [PM Data] 13 - Reset ALL DS1 Port Current Interval PM Data

2 - DS1 # 2 [PM Data] 14 - Reset ALL DS1 Port PM Data

3 - DS1 # 3 [PM Data]

4 - DS1 # 4 [PM Data] 15 - Reset ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

5 - DS1 # 5 [PM Data] 16 - Enable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

6 - DS1 # 6 [PM Data] 17 - Disable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

7 - DS1 # 7 [PM Data]

8 - DS1 # 8 [PM Data]

9 - DS1 # 9 [PM Data]

10 - DS1 #10 [PM Data]

11 - DS1 #11 [PM Data]

12 - DS1 #12 [PM Data]




DS1 # Port Stats MenuThe DS1 # Port Stats menu (see Figure 6-114) is used to view all performance monitoring statistics for the selected DS1 port.

Figure 6-114. DS1 # Port Stats Menu

The DS1 # Port Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-83.

Table 6-84 provides descriptions for the near end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens.

Table 6-83. DS1 # Port Stats Menu Options







5 Reset DS1 # Current Interval PM Data

This option is used to reset the current interval PM data for the selected DS1.

6 Reset DS1 # PM Data This option is used to reset the PM data for the selected DS1.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1

1 - Near End Daily




5 - Reset DS1 #1 Current Interval PM Data

6 - Reset DS1 #1 PM Data







Table 6-84. Near End Parameter Descriptions


CV-L Code Violation - Line This parameter indicates the number of Bipolar Violations (BPVs) that have occurred.

ES-L Errored Second - Line This parameter indicates the number of seconds for which one or more Coding Violations (CVs), or one or more Loss of Signal (LOS) defects occurred.

SES-L Severely Errored Second - Line

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 1544 or more BPVs or one or more LOS defects.

LOSS-L Loss of Signal Second - Line

This parameter indicates the number of seconds for which one or more LOS defects occurred.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Daily

Current 01/01 01/02 01/03 01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07

CV-L : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ES-L : 27 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

SES-L : 27 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

LOSS-L : 28 60 60 60 60 60 60 60






Table 6-84 on page 167 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Near End Quarter Hourly Menu menu.




MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Quarter Hourly

Current 11:30 11:15 11:00 10:45 10:30 10:15 10:00

1 - CV-L : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 - ES-L : 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

3 - SES-L : 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

4 - LOSS-L : 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10




MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Quarter Hourly->CV-L

11:45 0 07:30 0 03:15 0 23:00 0 18:45 0 14:30 0

11:30 0 07:15 0 03:00 0 22:45 0 18:30 0 14:15 0

11:15 0 07:00 0 02:45 0 22:30 0 18:15 0 14:00 0

11:00 0 06:45 0 02:30 0 22:15 0 18:00 0 13:45 0

10:45 0 06:30 0 02:15 0 22:00 0 17:45 0 13:30 0

10:30 0 06:15 0 02:00 0 21:45 0 17:30 0 13:15 0

10:15 0 06:00 0 01:45 0 21:30 0 17:15 0 13:00 0

10:00 0 05:45 0 01:30 0 21:15 0 17:00 0 12:45 0

09:45 0 05:30 0 01:15 0 21:00 0 16:45 0 12:30 0

09:30 0 05:15 0 01:00 0 20:45 0 16:30 0 12:15 0

09:15 0 05:00 0 00:45 0 20:30 0 16:15 0 12:00 0

09:00 0 04:45 0 00:30 0 20:15 0 16:00 0 11:45 0

08:45 0 04:30 0 00:15 0 20:00 0 15:45 0

08:30 0 04:15 0 00:00 0 19:45 0 15:30 0

08:15 0 04:00 0 23:45 0 19:30 0 15:15 0

08:00 0 03:45 0 23:30 0 19:15 0 15:00 0

07:45 0 03:30 0 23:15 0 19:00 0 14:45 0










5 Reset selected DS1 Thresholds to Defaults

This option is used to reset thresholds to the factory defaults for the selected DS1.

6 Enable selected DS1 Thresholds This option is used to enable thresholds for the selected DS1.

7 Disable selected DS1 Thresholds This option is used to disable thresholds for the selected DS1.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Daily Thresholds

Threshold Alarm

1 - CV-L : 133400 Disabled

2 - ES-L : 648 Disabled

3 - SES-L : 100 Disabled

4 - LOSS-L : 2 Disabled

5 - Reset selected DS1 Thresholds to Defaults

6 - Enable selected DS1 Thresholds

7 - Disable selected DS1 Thresholds




Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-119) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-119 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the near end parameters.









MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Daily Thresholds->CV-L

1 - CV-L Threshold : 133400

2 - CV-L Alarm : Disabled




DS1 Bonding Stats Menu

The DS1 Bonding Stats menu (see Figure 6-120 and Figure 6-121) allows access to the DS1 bonding statistics.

Figure 6-120. DS1 Bonding Stats Menu (Copper Mode)

Figure 6-121. DS1 Bonding Stats Menu (DS3 Mode)

The DS1 Bonding Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-87.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats

1 - DS1 # 1 [PM Data] 13 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data

2 - DS1 # 2 [PM Data] 14 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data

3 - DS1 # 3 [PM Data]

4 - DS1 # 4 [PM Data] 15 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

5 - DS1 # 5 [PM Data] 16 - Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

6 - DS1 # 6 [PM Data] 17 - Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

7 - DS1 # 7 [PM Data]

8 - DS1 # 8 [PM Data]

9 - DS1 # 9 [PM Data]

10 - DS1 #10 [PM Data]

11 - DS1 #11 [PM Data]

12 - DS1 #12 [PM Data]




MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats

1 - Trib #13 [PM Data] 13 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data

2 - Trib #14 [PM Data] 14 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data

3 - Trib #15 [PM Data]

4 - Trib #16 [PM Data] 15 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

5 - Trib #17 [PM Data] 16 - Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

6 - Trib #18 [PM Data] 17 - Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds










Table 6-87. DS1 Bonding Stats Menu Options


1 - 12

N/A DS1 #1 - #12 (PM Data) This option displays the “DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu (Copper Mode Only)” on page 6-173.

N/A 1 - 12

Trib #13 - #24 (PM Data) This option displays the “DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu (DS3 Mode Only)” on page 6-175.

13 13 Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data

This option is used to reset all DS1 bonding current interval performance monitoring data.

14 14 Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data This option is used to reset all DS1 bonding performance monitoring data.

15 15 Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

This option is used to reset all DS1 bonding thresholds.

16 16 Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

This option is used to enable all DS1 bonding thresholds.

17 17 Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

This option is used to disable all DS1 bonding thresholds.



DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu (Copper Mode Only)The DS1 # Bonding Stats menu (see Figure 6-123) is used to view the performance monitoring statistics for each DS1.

Figure 6-122. DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu

The DS1 # Bonding Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-89.

Table 6-88. DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu Options












MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->DS1 #1

1 - Near End Daily


3 - Far End Daily






9 - Reset DS1 #1 Current Interval PM Data

10 - Reset DS1 #1 PM Data





9 Reset DS1 # Current Interval PM Data

This option is used to reset the current interval performance monitoring data for the selected DS1.

10 Reset DS1 # PM Data This option is used to reset the performance monitoring data for the selected DS1.

Table 6-88. DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu Options (Continued)




DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu (DS3 Mode Only)The DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats menu (see Figure 6-123) is used to view the performance monitoring statistics for each DS1 tributary.

Figure 6-123. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu

The DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-89.

Table 6-89. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu Options












MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13

1 - Near End Daily


3 - Far End Daily






9 - Reset Trib #13 Current Interval PM Data

10 - Reset Trib #13 PM Data




Table 6-90 provides descriptions for the near end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens. Table 6-91 provides descriptions for the far end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens.


9 Reset Trib # Current Interval PM Data

This option is used to reset the current interval performance monitoring data for the selected tributary.

10 Reset Trib # PM Data This option is used to reset the performance monitoring data for the selected tributary.

Table 6-90. Near End Parameter Descriptions


CV-P Coding Violations - Path SF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of frame synchronization bit errors that have occurred during the accumulation period.ESF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of CRC-6 errors that have occurred during the accumula-tion period.

ES-P Errored Seconds - Path SF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of seconds containing any of the following:

• FE (Frame bit Error). This parameter indicates the occurrence of a frame bit error in the received frame bit pattern.

• CS (Controlled Slip) Event. This parameter indicates the replication of deletion of the 192 payload bits of a DS1 frame by the receiving unit.

• SEF (Severely Errored Frame) Defect. This parameter indicates that two or more frame bit errors are detected in a window.

• AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) Defect. This parameter indicates the detection of an unframed signal with a 1s density of at least 99.9% for a time.

ESF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of sec-onds containing any of the following:

• CRC-6 (Cyclic Redundancy Check) Error. This parameter indicates the existence of a CRC-6 code that is not identical to the corresponding locally calculated code.

• CS Event• SEF Defect• AIS Defect

Table 6-89. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu Options (Continued)




Note: The parameters in this table are defined for ESF mode only. The parameters are not defined for SF mode.

SES-P Severely Errored Seconds - Path

SF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 8 or more FE events or one or more SEF or AIS defects.ESF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of sec-onds with 320 or more CRC-6 errors or one or more SEF or AIS defects.

UAS-P Unavailable Seconds - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds for which the DS1 path contains 10 contiguous SESs.

Table 6-91. Far End Parameter Descriptions


CV-PFE Coding Violations - Path This parameter indicates the number of far end CVs, based on PRM bits G1-G6, that have occurred during the accumulation period. CV-PFE counts will be inhibited if PRM bit G6 equals 1.

ES-PFE Errored Seconds - Path This parameter indicates the number of one-second intervals containing a RAI signal or an 1 in any of the following PRM bits: G1-G6, SE, or SL = 1.

SES-PFE Severely Errored Seconds - Path

This parameter indicates the number of one-second intervals containing an 1 in the following PRM bits: G1 and SE.

UAS-PFE Unavailable Seconds - Path

This parameter indicates the number of one-second intervals for which the DS1 path is unavailable. UAS-PFE accumulates at the onset of ten contiguous SES-PFE and stop accumulating at the onset of ten contiguous seconds without SES-PFE.

Table 6-90. Near End Parameter Descriptions (Continued)









MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Daily

Current 01/01 01/02 01/03 01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07

CV-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ES-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SES-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

UAS-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0






Table 6-90 on page 176 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Near End Quarter Hourly menu.




MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Quarter Hourly

Current 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30 12:15 12:00 11:45

1 - CV-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 - ES-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 - SES-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 - UAS-P : 707 899 900 900 899 900 899 900




MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Quarter Hourly->CV-P

13:30 0 09:15 0 05:00 0 00:45 0 20:30 0 16:15 0

13:15 0 09:00 0 04:45 0 00:30 0 20:15 0 16:00 0

13:00 0 08:45 0 04:30 0 00:15 0 20:00 0 15:45 0

12:45 0 08:30 0 04:15 0 00:00 0 19:45 0 15:30 0

12:30 0 08:15 0 04:00 0 23:45 0 19:30 0 15:15 0

12:15 0 08:00 0 03:45 0 23:30 0 19:15 0 15:00 n/a

12:00 0 07:45 0 03:30 0 23:15 0 19:00 0 14:45 n/a

11:45 0 07:30 0 03:15 0 23:00 0 18:45 0 14:30 n/a

11:30 0 07:15 0 03:00 0 22:45 0 18:30 0 14:15 n/a

11:15 0 07:00 0 02:45 0 22:30 0 18:15 0 14:00 n/a

11:00 0 06:45 0 02:30 0 22:15 0 18:00 0 13:45 n/a

10:45 0 06:30 0 02:15 0 22:00 0 17:45 0 13:30 n/a

10:30 0 06:15 0 02:00 0 21:45 0 17:30 0

10:15 0 06:00 0 01:45 0 21:30 0 17:15 0

10:00 0 05:45 0 01:30 0 21:15 0 17:00 0

09:45 0 05:30 0 01:15 0 21:00 0 16:45 0

09:30 0 05:15 0 01:00 0 20:45 0 16:30 0



Far End Daily ScreenThe Far End Daily screen (see Figure 6-127) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days.

Figure 6-127. Far End Daily Screen

Table 6-91 on page 177 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Far End Daily screen.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Daily

Current 01/01 01/02 01/03 01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07

CV-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

ES-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

SES-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

UAS-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a




Far End Quarter Hourly MenuThe Far End Quarter Hourly menu (see Figure 6-128) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Far End Quarter Hourly menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-129).

Figure 6-128. Far End Quarter Hourly Menu

Table 6-91 on page 177 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Far End Quarter Hourly menu.




MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Quarter Hourly

Current 13:45 13:30 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30 12:15

1 - CV-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

2 - ES-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

3 - SES-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

4 - UAS-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a




MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Quarter Hourly->CV-PFE

14:00 n/a 09:45 n/a 05:30 n/a 01:15 n/a 21:00 n/a 16:45 n/a

13:45 n/a 09:30 n/a 05:15 n/a 01:00 n/a 20:45 n/a 16:30 n/a

13:30 n/a 09:15 n/a 05:00 n/a 00:45 n/a 20:30 n/a 16:15 n/a

13:15 n/a 09:00 n/a 04:45 n/a 00:30 n/a 20:15 n/a 16:00 n/a

13:00 n/a 08:45 n/a 04:30 n/a 00:15 n/a 20:00 n/a 15:45 n/a

12:45 n/a 08:30 n/a 04:15 n/a 00:00 n/a 19:45 n/a 15:30 n/a

12:30 n/a 08:15 n/a 04:00 n/a 23:45 n/a 19:30 n/a 15:15 n/a

12:15 n/a 08:00 n/a 03:45 n/a 23:30 n/a 19:15 n/a 15:00 n/a

12:00 n/a 07:45 n/a 03:30 n/a 23:15 n/a 19:00 n/a 14:45 n/a

11:45 n/a 07:30 n/a 03:15 n/a 23:00 n/a 18:45 n/a 14:30 n/a

11:30 n/a 07:15 n/a 03:00 n/a 22:45 n/a 18:30 n/a 14:15 n/a

11:15 n/a 07:00 n/a 02:45 n/a 22:30 n/a 18:15 n/a 14:00 n/a

11:00 n/a 06:45 n/a 02:30 n/a 22:15 n/a 18:00 n/a

10:45 n/a 06:30 n/a 02:15 n/a 22:00 n/a 17:45 n/a

10:30 n/a 06:15 n/a 02:00 n/a 21:45 n/a 17:30 n/a

10:15 n/a 06:00 n/a 01:45 n/a 21:30 n/a 17:15 n/a

10:00 n/a 05:45 n/a 01:30 n/a 21:15 n/a 17:00 n/a










5 Reset selected Trib Thresholds to Defaults

This option is used to reset thresholds to the factory defaults for the selected tributary.

6 Enable selected Trib Thresholds This option is used to enable thresholds for the selected tributary.

7 Disable selected Trib Thresholds This option is used to disable thresholds for the selected tributary.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Daily Thresholds

Threshold Alarm

1 - CV-P : 132960 Disabled

2 - ES-P : 648 Disabled

3 - SES-P : 100 Disabled

4 - UAS-P : 10 Disabled

5 - Reset selected Trib Thresholds to Defaults

6 - Enable selected Trib Thresholds

7 - Disable selected Trib Thresholds




Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-131) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-131 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the DS1 tributary near end param-eters.









MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Daily Thresholds->CV-P

1 - CV-P Threshold : 132960

2 - CV-P Alarm : Disabled




Far End Thresholds MenuThe Far End Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-132) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-132 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Far End Daily Thresholds menu and the Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.

Figure 6-132. Far End Thresholds Menu

The Far End Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-94.

Table 6-94. Far End Thresholds Menu Options


1 - 4 Far End Parameters (refer to Table 6-91 on page 177 for definitions)


5 Reset selected Trib Thresholds to Defaults

This option is used to reset thresholds to the factory defaults for the selected tributary.

6 Enable selected Trib Thresholds This option is used to enable thresholds for the selected tributary.

7 Disable selected Trib Thresholds This option is used to disable thresholds for the selected tributary.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Daily Thresholds

Threshold Alarm

1 - CV-PFE : 132960 Disabled

2 - ES-PFE : 648 Disabled

3 - SES-PFE : 100 Disabled

4 - UAS-PFE : 10 Disabled

5 - Reset selected Trib Thresholds to Defaults

6 - Enable selected Trib Thresholds

7 - Disable selected Trib Thresholds




Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-112) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-110 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the DS1 tributary far end param-eters.









MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Daily Thresholds->CV-PFE

1 - CV-PFE Threshold : 132960

2 - CV-PFE Alarm : Disabled




Bonding Group Stats Menu

The Bonding Group Stats menu (see Figure 6-134) is used to access performance monitoring statistics for all bonding groups.

Figure 6-134. Bonding Group Stats Menu

The Bonding Group Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-96.

Table 6-96. Bonding Group Stats Menu Options


1 - 4 Bonding Group 1 - 4 This option displays the “Bonding Group # Stats Menu” on page 6-187.

5 Reset ALL Bonding Group Current Interval PM Data

This option is used to reset current interval performance monitoring data for all bonding groups.

6 Reset ALL Bonding Group PM Data This option is used to reset performance monitoring data for all bonding groups.

7 Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

This option is used to reset thresholds for all bonding groups.

8 Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

This option is used to enable thresholds for all bonding groups.

9 Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

This option is used to disable thresholds for all bonding groups.



MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats

1 - Bonding Group 1

2 - Bonding Group 2

3 - Bonding Group 3

4 - Bonding Group 4

5 - Reset ALL Bonding Group Current Interval PM Data

6 - Reset ALL Bonding Group PM Data

7 - Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

8 - Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

9 - Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds




Bonding Group # Stats MenuThe Bonding # Group Stats menu (see Figure 6-135) is used to view statistics for each bonding group.

Figure 6-135. Bonding Group # Stats Menu

The Bonding Group # Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-97.

Table 6-97. Bonding Group # Stats Menu Options


1 Daily Performance This option displays the “Daily Performance Screen” on page 6-188.

2 Quarter Hourly Performance This option displays the “Quarter Hourly Performance Menu” on page 6-189.

3 Daily Thresholds This option displays the “Thresholds Menu” on page 6-190.

4 Quarter Hourly Thresholds This option displays the “Thresholds Menu” on page 6-190.

5 Reset Bonding Group # Current Interval PM Data

This option is used to reset current interval performance monitoring data for the selected bonding group.

6 Reset Bonding Group # PM Data This option is used to reset performance monitoring data for the selected bonding group.



MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1

1 - Daily Performance

2 - Quarter Hourly Performance

3 - Daily Thresholds

4 - Quarter Hourly Thresholds

5 - Reset Bonding Group #1 Current Interval PM Data

6 - Reset Bonding Group #1 PM Data




Table 6-98 provides descriptions for the bonding group parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens.

Daily Performance ScreenThe Daily Performance screen (see Figure 6-136) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days.

Figure 6-136. Daily Performance Screen

Table 6-98 on page 188 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Daily Performance screen.

Table 6-98. Bonding Group Parameter Descriptions

Parameter Description

Rx Frames Indicates the total number of frames received in a bonding group.

Rx Bytes Indicates the total number of bytes received in a bonding group.

Rx Errored Events Indicates the total number of errored events in a bonding group (including bad sequence IDs, lost fragments, and lost frame starts and ends).

Tx Frames Indicates the total number of frames transmitted in a bonding group.

Tx Bytes Indicates the total number of bytes transmitted in a bonding group.



MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Daily

Current 01/01 01/02 01/03 01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07

Rx Frames : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Rx Bytes : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Rx Errored Events : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Tx Frames : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Tx Bytes : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a




Quarter Hourly Performance MenuThe Quarter Hourly Performance menu (see Figure 6-137) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Quarter Hourly Performance menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-138).

Figure 6-137. Quarter Hourly Performance Menu

Table 6-98 on page 188 provides definitions for the parameters used on Quarter Hourly Performance menu.




MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Quarter Hourly

Current 14:15 14:00 13:45 13:30 13:15 13:00

1 - Rx Frames : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 - Rx Bytes : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 - Rx Errored Events : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 - Tx Frames : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

5 - Tx Bytes : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0




MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Quarter Hourly->Rx Frames

14:30 0 10:15 0 06:00 0 01:45 0 21:30 0 17:15 0

14:15 0 10:00 0 05:45 0 01:30 0 21:15 0 17:00 0

14:00 0 09:45 0 05:30 0 01:15 0 21:00 0 16:45 0

13:45 0 09:30 0 05:15 0 01:00 0 20:45 0 16:30 0

13:30 0 09:15 0 05:00 0 00:45 0 20:30 0 16:15 0

13:15 0 09:00 0 04:45 0 00:30 0 20:15 0 16:00 0

13:00 0 08:45 0 04:30 0 00:15 0 20:00 0 15:45 0

12:45 0 08:30 0 04:15 0 00:00 0 19:45 0 15:30 0

12:30 0 08:15 0 04:00 0 23:45 0 19:30 0 15:15 0

12:15 0 08:00 0 03:45 0 23:30 0 19:15 0 15:00 n/a

12:00 0 07:45 0 03:30 0 23:15 0 19:00 0 14:45 n/a

11:45 0 07:30 0 03:15 0 23:00 0 18:45 0 14:30 n/a

11:30 0 07:15 0 03:00 0 22:45 0 18:30 0

11:15 0 07:00 0 02:45 0 22:30 0 18:15 0

11:00 0 06:45 0 02:30 0 22:15 0 18:00 0

10:45 0 06:30 0 02:15 0 22:00 0 17:45 0

10:30 0 06:15 0 02:00 0 21:45 0 17:30 0



Thresholds MenuThe Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-139) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-139 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Daily Thresholds menu and the Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.

Figure 6-139. Thresholds Menu

The Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-99.

Table 6-99. Thresholds Menu Options


1 - 5 Bonding Group Parameters (refer to Table 6-98 on page 188 for definitions)


6 Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds to Defaults

This option is used to reset all bonding group thresholds to the factory defaults.

7 Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

This option is used to enable all bonding group thresholds.

8 Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

This option is used to disable all bonding group thresholds.



MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Daily Thrs

Threshold Alarm

1 - Rx Frames : 268435455 Disabled

2 - Rx Bytes : 268435455 Disabled

3 - Rx Error Events : 500 Disabled

4 - Tx Frames : 268435455 Disabled

5 - Tx Bytes : 268435455 Disabled

6 - Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

7 - Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

8 - Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds




Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-140) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-140 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the bonding group parameters.









MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Daily Thrs->Rx Frames

1 - Rx Frames Threshold : 268435455

2 - Rx Frames Alarm : Disabled




Ethernet Stats Menu

The Ethernet Stats menu (see Figure 6-134) is used to view access the performance monitoring statistics for each Ethernet client port.

Figure 6-141. Ethernet Stats Menu

The Ethernet Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-96.

Table 6-101. Ethernet Stats Menu Options


1 - 4 Ethernet Port 1 - 4 This option displays the “Ethernet Port # Stats Menu” on page 6-193.

5 Reset ALL Ethernet Client Current Interval PM Data

This option is used to reset current interval performance monitoring data for all Ethernet client ports.

6 Reset ALL Ethernet Client PM Data This option is used to reset performance monitoring data for all Ethernet client ports.

7 Reset ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

This option is used to reset thresholds for all Ethernet client ports.

8 Enable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

This option is used to enable thresholds for all Ethernet client ports.

9 Disable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

This option is used to disable thresholds for all Ethernet client ports.



MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats

1 - Ethernet Port 1

2 - Ethernet Port 2

3 - Ethernet Port 3

4 - Ethernet Port 4

5 - Reset ALL Ethernet Client Current Interval PM Data

6 - Reset ALL Ethernet Client PM Data

7 - Reset ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

8 - Enable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

9 - Disable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds




Ethernet Port # Stats MenuThe Ethernet Port # Stats menu (see Figure 6-142) is used to view the performance monitoring statistics and set thresholds for each Ethernet client port.

Figure 6-142. Ethernet Port # Stats Menu

The Ethernet Port # Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-102.

Table 6-102. Ethernet Port # Stats Menu Options


1 Daily Performance This option displays the “Daily Performance Menu” on page 6-195.

2 Quarter Hourly Performance This option displays the “Quarter Hourly Performance Menu” on page 6-196.

3 Daily Thresholds This option displays the “Thresholds Menu” on page 6-197.

4 Quarter Hourly Thresholds This option displays the “Thresholds Menu” on page 6-197.

5 Reset Ethernet Port # Current Interval PM Data

This option is used to reset current interval performance monitoring data for the selected Ethernet client port.

6 Reset Ethernet Port # PM Data This option is used to reset performance monitoring data for the selected Ethernet client port.



MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1

1 - Daily Performance

2 - Quarter Hourly Performance

3 - Daily Thresholds

4 - Quarter Hourly Thresholds

5 - Reset Ethernet Port #1 Current Interval PM Data

6 - Reset Ethernet Port #1 PM Data




Table 6-103 provides descriptions for the Ethernet parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens.

Table 6-103. Ethernet Parameter Descriptions

Parameter Description

Rx Packets Indicates the total number of packets (including bad packets) received.

Rx Octets Indicates the total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Rx CRC & Align Errors Indicates the total number of packets received that have a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1664 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Rx Undersize Packets Indicates the total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

Rx Oversize Packets Indicates the total number of packets received that were longer than 1664 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

Rx Collisions Indicates the total number of collisions detected on this interface.

Tx Packets Indicates the total number of packets transmitted.

Tx Octets Indicates the total number of octets transmitted.



Daily Performance MenuThe Daily Performance menu (see Figure 6-143) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days. Each option on the Daily Performance menu displays a detailed view of the daily statistics for the selected parameter as shown in Figure 6-144.

Figure 6-143. Daily Performance Menu

Table 6-103 on page 194 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Daily Perfor-mance menu.

Figure 6-144. Detailed Daily Performance Screen



MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Daily

Current 12/31 12/30 12/29 12/28 12/27 12/26

1 - Rx Packets : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

2 - Rx Octets : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

3 - Rx CRC & Align Errors : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

4 - Rx Undersize Packets : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

5 - Rx Oversize Packets : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

6 - Rx Collisions : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

7 - Tx Packets : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

8 - Tx Octets : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a




MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Daily->Detailed

Rx Packets

Current : 0

12/31 : n/a

12/30 : n/a

12/29 : n/a

12/28 : n/a

12/27 : n/a

12/26 : n/a

12/25 : n/a




Quarter Hourly Performance MenuThe Quarter Hourly Performance menu (see Figure 6-145) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Quarter Hourly Performance menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-146).

Figure 6-145. Quarter Hourly Performance Menu

Table 6-103 on page 194 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Quarter Hourly Performance menu.




MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Quarter Hourly

Current 16:00 15:45 15:30 15:15 15:00 14:45

1 - Rx Packets : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 - Rx Octets : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 - Rx CRC & Align Errors : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 - Rx Undersize Packets : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

5 - Rx Oversize Packets : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6 - Rx Collisions : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7 - Tx Packets : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

8 - Tx Octets : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0




MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Quarter Hourly->Rx Octets

15:00 0 10:45 0 06:30 0 02:15 0 22:00 0 17:45 0

14:45 0 10:30 0 06:15 0 02:00 0 21:45 0 17:30 0

14:30 0 10:15 0 06:00 0 01:45 0 21:30 0 17:15 0

14:15 0 10:00 0 05:45 0 01:30 0 21:15 0 17:00 0

14:00 0 09:45 0 05:30 0 01:15 0 21:00 0 16:45 0

13:45 0 09:30 0 05:15 0 01:00 0 20:45 0 16:30 0

13:30 0 09:15 0 05:00 0 00:45 0 20:30 0 16:15 0

13:15 0 09:00 0 04:45 0 00:30 0 20:15 0 16:00 0

13:00 0 08:45 0 04:30 0 00:15 0 20:00 0 15:45 0

12:45 0 08:30 0 04:15 0 00:00 0 19:45 0 15:30 0

12:30 0 08:15 0 04:00 0 23:45 0 19:30 0 15:15 0

12:15 0 08:00 0 03:45 0 23:30 0 19:15 0 15:00 n/a

12:00 0 07:45 0 03:30 0 23:15 0 19:00 0

11:45 0 07:30 0 03:15 0 23:00 0 18:45 0

11:30 0 07:15 0 03:00 0 22:45 0 18:30 0

11:15 0 07:00 0 02:45 0 22:30 0 18:15 0

11:00 0 06:45 0 02:30 0 22:15 0 18:00 0



Thresholds MenuThe Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-147) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-147 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Daily Thresholds menu and the Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.

Figure 6-147. Thresholds Menu

The Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-104.

Table 6-104. Thresholds Menu Options


1 - 7 Ethernet Parameters (refer to Table 6-103 on page 194 for definitions)


6 Reset Thresholds to Defaults for selected Port

This option is used to reset thresholds to the factory defaults for the selected port.

7 Enable Thresholds for selected Port This option is used to enable thresholds for the selected port.

8 Disable Thresholds for selected Port This option is used to disable thresholds for the selected port.



MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Daily Thrs

Threshold Alarm

1 - Rx Packets : 268435455 Disabled

2 - Rx Octets : 268435455 Disabled

3 - CRC & Align Errors : 500 Disabled

4 - Undersize Packets : 268435455 Disabled

5 - Oversize Packets : 268435455 Disabled

6 - Collisions : 268435455 Disabled

7 - Tx Packets : 268435455 Disabled

8 - Tx Octets : 268435455 Disabled

9 - Reset Thresholds to Defaults for selected Port

10 - Enable Thresholds for selected Port

11 - Disable Thresholds for selected Port




Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-148) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-148 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the Ethernet parameters.









MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Daily Thrs->Rx Octets

1 - Rx Octets Threshold : 10

2 - Rx Octets Alarm : Disabled




System Alarms MenuThe System Alarms menu (see Figure 6-149) provides options for viewing all alarms affecting MX3112 system operations. Alarms may be viewed within the Master Log screen. The Environmental Alarms menu contains user-provisionable options. The Alarm Chronology menu offers the viewing of alarms in either ascending or descending order.

Figure 6-149. System Alarms Menu

The System Alarms menu options are shown in Table 6-106.

Table 6-106. System Alarms Menu Options


1 Master Log This option displays the “Master Alarms Log Screen” on page 6-200.

2 Controller A This option displays the “Controller Alarms Log Screen” on page 6-202.

Controller B This option displays the “Controller Alarms Log Screen” on page 6-202 when Controller B is installed.

4 User-Definable Alarms This option displays the “User-Definable Alarms Menu” on page 6-204.

5 Alarm Chronology : Ascending This option is used to select the alarm chronology. Options are as follows:

• Ascending• Descending



MX3112->System Alarms

1 - Master Log

2 - Controller A

Controller B

4 - User-Definable Alarms

5 - Alarm Chronology : Ascending




Master Alarms Log Screen

The Master Alarms Log screen (see Figure 6-150) is used to review and acknowledge all system alarms.

Figure 6-150. Master Alarms Log Screen

The Master Alarms Log screen fields are shown in Table 6-107.

Table 6-107. Master Alarms Log Screen Fields

Field Description

Date This field displays the date that the alarm was initiated.

Time This field displays the time that the alarm was initiated.

Pos This field displays the position (source) of the alarm. Possible sources are as follows:

• CA = Controller A• CB = Controller B• MA = Module A• MB = Module B

Type This field displays the type of the card that originates the alarm. Possible types are as follows:

• Controller• Module

Port This field displays the port/interface associated with the alarm.



Alarm Log - Master Alarms Alarms 1 to 13 of 13 Page 1 of 1

Date Time Pos Type Port Level Description Status

07/08/05 16:46:58 CA Controller ENV Major PWR B FAIL *Active

07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #1 Major DS1 LOS *Active












---------------------------->>> END OF ALARM LOG <<<----------------------------

Inverse = Active * = Unacknowledged Chronology = Ascending

(N)ext (P)rev (F)irst (L)ast (C)lear (A)cknowledge (S)elect Log



The Master Alarms Log screen hot keys are shown in Table 6-108.

Level This field displays the severity level of the alarm. Possible states are as follows:

• Info• Alert• Minor• Major• Critical

Description This field displays a brief description of the alarm.

Status This field displays the status of the alarm. Possible states are as follows:

• Active• Clear• Event

An asterik (*) is displayed beside the status if the alarm is unacknowledged.

Table 6-108. Master Alarms Log Screen Hot Keys

Hot Keys Description Function

N Next This hot key is used to display the next page of alarms.

P Previous This hot key is used to display the previous page of alarms.

F First This hot key is used to display the first page of alarms.

L Last This hot key is used to display the last page of alarms.

C Clear This hot key is used to clear all acknowledged alarms.

A Acknowledge This hot key is used to acknowledge all alarms.

S Select Log This hot key is used to access a specific alarm log. Options are as follows:

• M = Master• C = Controller

Table 6-107. Master Alarms Log Screen Fields (Continued)

Field Description



Controller Alarms Log Screen

The Controller Alarms Log screen (see Figure 6-151) is used to review and acknowledge controller card alarms.

Figure 6-151. Controller Alarms Log Screen

The Controller Alarms Log screen fields are shown in Table 6-109.

Table 6-109. Controller Alarms Log Screen Fields

Field Description

Date This field displays the date that the alarm was initiated.

Time This field displays the time that the alarm was initiated.

Pos This field displays the position (source) of the alarm. Possible sources are as follows:

• CA = Controller A• CB = Controller B• MA = Module A• MB = Module B

Type This field displays the type of the card that originates the alarm. Possible types are as follows:

• Controller• Module

Port This field displays the port/interface associated with the alarm.



Alarm Log - Controller Alarms Alarms 1 to 14 of 21 Page 1 of

Date Time Pos Type Port Level Description Status

07/08/05 16:46:58 CA Controller ENV Major PWR B FAIL *Active













---------------------------->>> END OF ALARM LOG <<<----------------------------

Inverse = Active * = Unacknowledged Chronology = Ascending

(N)ext (P)rev (F)irst (L)ast (C)lear (A)cknowledge (S)elect Log



The Controller Alarms Log screen hot keys are shown in Table 6-110.

Level This field displays the severity level of the alarm. Possible states are as follows:

• Info• Alert• Minor• Major• Critical

Description This field displays a brief description of the alarm.

Status This field displays the status of the alarm. Possible states are as follows:

• Active• Clear• Event

An asterik (*) is displayed beside the status if the alarm is unacknowledged.

Table 6-110. Controller Alarms Log Screen Hot Keys

Hot Keys Description Function

N Next This hot key is used to display the next page of alarms.

P Previous This hot key is used to display the previous page of alarms.

F First This hot key is used to display the first page of alarms.

L Last This hot key is used to display the last page of alarms.

C Clear This hot key is used to clear all acknowledged alarms.

A Acknowledge This hot key is used to acknowledge all alarms.

S Select Log This hot key is used to access a specific alarm log. Options are as follows:

• M = Master• C = Controller

Table 6-109. Controller Alarms Log Screen Fields (Continued)

Field Description



User-Definable Alarms Menu

The User-Definable Alarms menu (see Figure 6-152) allows access to environmental and stand-by controller alarms.

Figure 6-152. User-Definable Alarms Menu

The User-Definable Alarms menu options are shown in Table 6-111.

Table 6-111. User-Definable Alarms Menu Options


1 Environmental Alarms This option displays the “Environmental Alarms Menu” on page 6-205.

2 Stand-by Controller Removed Level This option displays the severity of the alarm gener-ated if the stand-by controller card is removed. Options are as follows:

• Disabled. Alarm is suppressed.• Info• Alert• Minor• Major• Critical



MX3112->System Alarms->User-Definable Alarms

1 - Environmental Alarms

2 - Stand-by Controller Removed Level : Minor




Environmental Alarms MenuThe Environmental Alarms menu (see Figure 6-153) provides access to the auxiliary input and power feed alarms.

Figure 6-153. Environmental Alarms Menu

The Environmental Alarms menu options are shown in Table 6-112.

Table 6-112. Environmental Alarms Menu Options


1 - 4 Aux #1 - #4 Input This option displays the “Auxiliary Input Menu” on page 6-206.

5 - 6 PWR Bus A - B Input This option displays the “Power Menu” on page 6-207.



MX3112->System Alarms->User-Definable Alarms->Environmental Alarms

Source Description Level

1 - Aux #1 Input AUX #1 INPUT Major




5 - PWR Bus A Input PWR A FAIL Major

6 - PWR Bus B Input PWR B FAIL Major




Auxiliary Input MenuThe Auxiliary Input menu (see Figure 6-154) is used to input the description of the selected auxiliary input and set the alarm severity level.

Figure 6-154. Auxiliary Input Menu

The Auxiliary Input menu options are shown in Table 6-113.

Table 6-113. Auxiliary Input Menu Options


1 AUX Input Description This option is used to enter a 16-character, auxiliary input description.

2 AUX Input Level This option is used to set the alarm severity level of the selected auxiliary input. Options are as follows:

• Disabled. Alarm is suppressed.• Info• Alert• Minor• Major• Critical• ACO. The input serves as an ACO input.



MX3112->System Alarms->User-Definable Alarms->Environmental Alarms->Aux

1 - AUX #1 Input Description : AUX #1 INPUT

2 - AUX #1 Input Level : Major




Power MenuThe Power menu (see Figure 6-155) is used to set the alarm severity level for the selected power bus input.

Figure 6-155. Power Menu

The Power menu options are shown in Table 6-114.

Table 6-114. Power Menu Options


1 PWR FAIL Level This option is used to set the alarm severity level of the selected power bus input. Options are as follows:

• Disabled. Alarm is suppressed.• Info• Alert• Minor• Major• Critical



MX3112->System Alarms->User-Definable Alarms->Environmental Alarms->Power

1 - PWR A FAIL Level : Major




Remote Management MenuThe Remote Management menu (Figure 6-156) provides menu access to a remote (RT) MX3112 from a local system. The Remote Management menu is available on an MX3112 that is operating in COT mode. If connected to one or more remote MX3112 systems at the far end of one or more bonding groups, the Remote Management menu will list the remote systems by their system ID as shown in Figure 6-156.

The Remote Management menu traffic between the COT and the RT systems is carried by one of the bonding groups as in-band traffic. The COT and RT systems communicate with each other to designate one of the bonding groups to carry this management traffic. This commu-nication is performed via a proprietary messaging system over DS1 FDL channels. The bonding group used for carrying this menu traffic is automatically selected according to its available bandwidth compared with other bonding groups. The menu traffic can automati-cally shift to another bonding group in the event of bandwidth impairments.

Figure 6-156. Remote Management Menu

The Remote Management menu options are shown in Table 6-115.

Table 6-115. Remote Management Menu Options


1 MX3112 REMOTE This option gives access to the log-on screen for the remote MX3112 system. All screens are the same as the screens for the local MX3112 system.



MX3112->Remote Menu Access

1 - MX3112 REMOTE [Critical]




Firmware Upgrade MenuThe Firmware Upgrade menu (Figure 6-157) provides access to upgrade the firmware for both controllers and both expansion modules. For additional information on firmware upgrades, refer to “Firmware Upgrade Procedures” on page 7-2.

Figure 6-157. Firmware Upgrade Menu

The Firmware Upgrade menu options are shown in Table 6-116.

Table 6-116. Firmware Upgrade Menu Options


C MX3112 This option displays the “Method Menu” on page 6-210.



MX3112->Firmware Upgrade

C MX3112........ - A [A00.20]

.............. - B []




Method Menu

The Method menu (Figure 6-158) provides options for upgrading the MX3112 firmware.

CAUTIONResetting this card will disrupt traffic and cause a switch to the standby card if it is installed.

Figure 6-158. Method Menu

The Method menu options are shown in Table 6-117.

The Method menu fields are shown in Table 6-118.

Table 6-117. Method Menu Options


1 Y-Modem This option is used to transfer the new application software to the unit via YModem.

2 TFTP This option displays the “TFTP Update Menu” on page 6-211.

3 Reset Active Controller This option resets the active controller card. Reset-ting the active controller card switches operation to the standby card. In a redundant system, the standby card will update and automatically reset.



MX3112->Firmware Upgrade->Method

1 - Y-Modem

2 - TFTP

3 - Reset Active Controller (A)

Controller A status: Ready for transfer

Controller B status: Not available




TFTP Update MenuThe TFTP Update menu (Figure 6-159) is used to download code stored from a computer to the MX3112 through a TFTP server.

Figure 6-159. TFTP Update Menu

The TFTP Update menu options are shown in Table 6-119.

Table 6-118. Method Menu Fields

Field Description

Controller A - B status This field displays the progress of the TFTP download for the controller. Progress messages are as follows:

• Ready for transfer• Not available• Transfer in progress

Table 6-119. TFTP Update Menu Options


1 TFTP Server This option is used to enter the IP address of the TFTP server hosting the application software file.

2 Remote Filename This option is used to enter the path and filename of the application software file on the TFTP server.

3 Initiate Transfer This option displays the “TFTP Update Status Screen” on page 6-212.



MX3112->Firmware Upgrade->Method->TFTP Update

1 - TFTP Server : 172.22.146.57

2 - Remote Filename : mx3112/ao1.bin

3 - Initiate Transfer




TFTP Update Status ScreenThe TFTP Update Status screen (Figure 6-160) displays the status of the TFTP connection.

Figure 6-160. TFTP Update Status Screen

The TFTP Update Status screen options are shown in Table 6-120.

Table 6-120. TFTP Update Status Screen Options

Field Description

TFTP Server This field displays the IP address of the TFTP server. The TFTP IP address must be configured prior to attempting a TFTP download.

Remote Filename This field displays the TFTP filename that will be used to upgrade the controller.

TFTP Status This field displays the progress of the TFTP download. Table 6-121 describes the TFTP download progress messages.

Controller A - B status This field displays the progress of the TFTP download for the Controller A. Progress messages are as follows:

• Ready for transfer• Not available• Transfer in progress



MX3112->Firmware Upgrade->Method->TFTP Update->Status

TFTP Server : 172.22.146.57

Remote Filename : mx3112/ao1.bin

TFTP Status : Contacting Server -

Controller A status: Transfer in progress





The TFTP Update Status screen hot key is shown in Table 6-122.

LogoutSelection of the Logout menu item results in an immediate exit from the program, no further menus, screens, or confirmation dialog boxes are presented.

Table 6-121. TFTP Download Progress Messages

Progress Message Description

Contacting Server This message indicates that an attempt to establish communication with the TFTP network server specified by the server address in the TFTP Server IP Address field is in progress.

Timed Out This message indicates that communication with the TFTP network server has been lost.

Beginning TFTP Transfer This message indicates that communication with the TFTP network server has been established and the update file is being transferred between the TFTP network server and the MX3112.

Completed This message indicates that the MX3112 successfully received the update file.

File Not Found This message indicates that the TFTP network server was unable to locate the specified file name or path in the Remote Filename field.

Access Violation This status indicates that the TFTP network server denied the MX3112 access to the given update filename and path. Please verify appropriate user rights are selected for the specified path.

Table 6-122. TFTP Update Status Screen Hot Key

Hot Key Description Function

C Cancel TFTP Transfer This option is used to cancel the TFTP transfer.


Section 7Maintenance

INTRODUCTIONThe MX3 chassis and MX3112 controller card do not require routine maintenance for normal operation. However, the MX3 fan module does require routine maintenance as described in the MX3 Fan Module Maintenance section. Firmware upgrade procedures are also provided.

ADTRAN does not recommend that repairs be attempted in the field. Repair services can be obtained by returning the defective unit to ADTRAN. For warranty information, refer to “Appendix A, Warranty”.

MX3 FAN MODULE MAINTENANCEReplacement filters (P/N 1189009L1) are available and can be ordered separately. This is a plug-in assembly and can be replaced without powering down the chassis.

Minimal routine maintenance of the MX3 fan module is required. The filter should be inspected for excessive dust at least every 90 days and replaced as needed. To replace the filter, perform the following steps:

1. Using a flat or phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the screw on the left side of the front panel of the MX3 fan module.

2. Remove the MX3 fan module, taking care not to disturb the filter.

3. Remove the old filter, taking care not to allow dust from the filter to enter the system.

4. Install a new filter (P/N 1189009L1).

5. Install the MX3 fan module back into the MX3 chassis.

6. Tighten the screw to secure the MX3 fan module to the MX3 chassis.



FIRMWARE UPGRADE PROCEDURESThe MX3112 supports firmware transfers via Y-modem (craft or Telnet menu sessions), TFTP transfer, and controller-to-controller transfer.

Upgrading a Redundant SystemWhen upgrading a redundant system via Y-modem or TFTP transfer (see Figure 7-1), the procedure is as follows:

1. The user initiates the transfer from the active controller.

2. The transfer begins to both the active and stand-by controllers simultaneously.

3. When the file is received, it is verified for integrity and compatibility with the hardware.

4. The stand-by controller proceeds to program the new firmware, and then reboots automatically.

5. When the active controller detects a successful reboot of the stand-by controller, the active controller proceeds to program the new firmware.

6. The user is then requested to manually reboot the active controller.

7. When the user initiates the reboot of the active controller, a protection switch will take place to the stand-by controller and the active controller will reboot.

Figure 7-1. Firmware Upgrade Method Menu

During critical phases of the upgrade procedure, the ACT LED on the front panel will become solid amber. It is very important for the system to remain undisturbed during this process. Removing a controller during a critical phase of this process could corrupt the firmware that resides on the controller.




1 - Y-Modem

2 - TFTP


Controller A status: Successful. Manually reset active controller.




Section 7, Maintenance - Firmware Upgrade Procedures

Controller-to-Controller TransferIf two controllers are operating redundantly, and one controller has a newer version than the other, the user may initiate a direct firmware transfer of the newer firmware from one controller to the other, regardless of which is active. Options will become available on the menu as shown below in Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-2. Firmware Upgrade Menu

Figure 7-3. Method Menu



MX3112->Firmware Upgrade

C MX3112........ - A [A03]

MX3112........ - B [A02]





1 - Y-Modem

2 - TFTP


4 - Upgrade controller B to version A03

Controller A status: Ready for transfer

Controller B status: Ready for transfer

Note: When transferring via Y-modem or TFTP, the standby

controller will update before the active controller.



Appendix AWarranty

WARRANTY AND CUSTOMER SERVICEADTRAN will replace or repair this product within the warranty period if it does not meet its published specifications or fails while in service. Warranty information can be found at www.adtran.com/warranty.

Refer to the following subsections for sales, support, Customer and Product Service (CAPS) requests, or further information.

ADTRAN SalesPricing/Availability:

800-827-0807

ADTRAN Technical SupportPre-Sales Applications/Post-Sales Technical Assistance:

800-726-8663

Standard hours: Monday - Friday, 7 a.m. - 7 p.m. CST Emergency hours: 7 days/week, 24 hours/day

ADTRAN Repair/CAPSReturn for Repair/Upgrade:

(256) 963-8722

Repair and Return AddressContact CAPS prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN.

ADTRAN, Inc. CAPS Department 901 Explorer Boulevard Huntsville, Alabama 35806-2807

61189901L1-1A PRELIMINARY A-1

http://www.adtran.com/warranty

Carrier Networks Division901 Explorer Blvd.

Huntsville, AL 35806

®

adtran mx3112 manual

Documents